Dell Configuration Guide for the S4048T–ON System 9.10(0.1) May 2016 Rev.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2016 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
Contents Chapter 1: About this Guide........................................................................................................... 29 Audience............................................................................................................................................................................... 29 Conventions.......................................................................................................................................................................
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode..................................................................................................................53 Moving a Command from EXEC Privilege Mode to EXEC Mode........................................................................... 53 Allowing Access to CONFIGURATION Mode Commands....................................................................................... 53 Allowing Access to Different Modes..........................................................
Forcibly Authorizing or Unauthorizing a Port...................................................................................................................80 Re-Authenticating a Port.................................................................................................................................................... 81 Configuring Timeouts..........................................................................................................................................................
Guidelines for Configuring ACL Logging.................................................................................................................... 113 Configuring ACL Logging............................................................................................................................................. 113 Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs......................................................................................................................
Configuring AS4 Number Representations...............................................................................................................162 Configuring Peer Groups.............................................................................................................................................163 Configuring BGP Fast Fall-Over.................................................................................................................................166 Configuring Passive Peering.
Configure Control Plane Policing.................................................................................................................................... 202 Configuring CoPP for Protocols................................................................................................................................203 Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues..........................................................................................................................204 CoPP for OSPFv3 Packets.
Chapter 13: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)............................................................. 247 DHCP Packet Format and Options................................................................................................................................. 247 Assign an IP Address using DHCP.................................................................................................................................. 248 Implementation Information....................................
FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack.......................................................................................................................................276 Using FIP Snooping........................................................................................................................................................... 276 FIP Snooping Prerequisites........................................................................................................................................
Chapter 19: High Availability (HA).................................................................................................302 Component Redundancy..................................................................................................................................................302 Automatic and Manual Stack Unit Failover..............................................................................................................302 Synchronization between Management and Standby Units.
Configuring Layer 2 (Data Link) Mode..................................................................................................................... 329 Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode......................................................................................................................330 Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode...................................................................................................................... 330 Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode...
Dynamic Counters.............................................................................................................................................................356 Clearing Interface Counters.......................................................................................................................................356 Chapter 22: Internet Protocol Security (IPSec)............................................................................. 357 Configuring IPSec .......................
Addressing.................................................................................................................................................................... 377 Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS.................................................................................................................378 ICMPv6.........................................................................................................................................................................
Implementation Information..............................................................................................................................................401 Configuration Information................................................................................................................................................ 402 Configuration Tasks for IS-IS.....................................................................................................................................
Configure Redundant Pairs..............................................................................................................................................440 Far-End Failure Detection................................................................................................................................................ 443 FEFD State Changes..................................................................................................................................................
Preventing MSDP from Advertising a Local Source..................................................................................................... 481 Logging Changes in Peership States.............................................................................................................................. 482 Terminating a Peership.....................................................................................................................................................
Protocol Overview............................................................................................................................................................. 519 Autonomous System (AS) Areas............................................................................................................................... 519 Area Types...................................................................................................................................................................
Enable PIM-SM................................................................................................................................................................. 575 Configuring S,G Expiry Timers.........................................................................................................................................576 Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point.........................................................................................................................
Enabling PVST+ Extend System ID................................................................................................................................. 610 PVST+ Sample Configurations......................................................................................................................................... 611 Chapter 42: Quality of Service (QoS)............................................................................................ 613 Implementation Information...................
Chapter 44: Remote Monitoring (RMON)...................................................................................... 655 Implementation Information.............................................................................................................................................655 Fault Recovery.................................................................................................................................................................. 655 Setting the RMON Alarm...........
Configuring the HMAC Algorithm for the SSH Server...........................................................................................684 Configuring the SSH Server Cipher List.................................................................................................................. 685 Secure Shell Authentication.......................................................................................................................................685 Troubleshooting SSH..........................
Changing the Polling Intervals......................................................................................................................................... 720 Back-Off Mechanism.........................................................................................................................................................721 sFlow on LAG ports...................................................................................................................................................
Stack Management Roles.......................................................................................................................................... 746 Stack Master Election................................................................................................................................................. 747 Virtual IP......................................................................................................................................................................
STP Root Guard................................................................................................................................................................ 779 Root Guard Scenario................................................................................................................................................... 779 Configuring Root Guard............................................................................................................................................
Displaying Uplink Failure Detection................................................................................................................................. 809 Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection..............................................................................................................811 Chapter 58: Upgrade Procedures.................................................................................................. 812 Chapter 59: Virtual LANs (VLANs)..................
Troubleshooting VLT........................................................................................................................................................ 853 Reconfiguring Stacked Switches as VLT.......................................................................................................................854 Specifying VLT Nodes in a PVLAN.................................................................................................................................
Sample Configurations..................................................................................................................................................... 906 VRRP in a VRF Configuration.....................................................................................................................................910 VRRP for IPv6 Configuration.....................................................................................................................................
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S4048–ON platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 9.7.(0.1) and beyond.S4048–ON stacking is supported with Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.1) and beyond.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
• • EXEC Privilege mode has commands to view configurations, clear counters, manage configuration files, run diagnostics, and enable or disable debug operations. The privilege level is 15, which is unrestricted. You can configure a password for this mode; refer to the Configure the Enable Password section in the Getting Started chapter.
ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE SUPPORTASSIST TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode. Move linearly through the command modes, except for the end command which takes you directly to EXEC Privilege mode and the exit command which moves you up one command mode level.
Table 1.
Table 1.
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed ------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 0 up 0 1 2 up up 0 up 0 1 3 up up 0 up 0 Speed in RPM Undoing Commands When you enter a command, the command line is added to the running configuration file (running-config). To disable a command and remove it from the running-config, enter the no command, then the original command.
Entering and Editing Commands Notes for entering commands. • • • • • • The CLI is not case-sensitive. You can enter partial CLI keywords. ○ Enter the minimum number of letters to uniquely identify a command. For example, you cannot enter cl as a partial keyword because both the clock and class-map commands begin with the letters “cl.” You can enter clo, however, as a partial keyword because only one command begins with those three letters. The TAB key auto-completes keywords in commands.
Filtering show Command Outputs Filter the output of a show command to display specific information by adding | [except | find | grep | no-more | save] specified_text after the command. The variable specified_text is the text for which you are filtering and it IS case sensitive unless you use the ignore-case suboption. Starting with Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.0, the grep command accepts an ignore-case sub-option that forces the search to case-insensitive.
• On the system that telnets into the switch, this message appears: % Warning: The following users are currently configuring the system: User "" on line console0 • On the system that is connected over the console, this message appears: % Warning: User "" on line vty0 "10.11.130.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Accessing the Console Port To access the console port, follow these steps: For the console port pinout, refer to Accessing the RJ-45 Console Port with a DB-9 Adapter. 1. Install an RJ-45 copper cable into the console port.Use a rollover (crossover) cable to connect the S4810 console port to a terminal server. 2. Connect the other end of the cable to the DTE terminal server. 3.
Executing Local CLI Scripts Using an SSH Connection You can execute CLI commands by entering a CLI script in one of the following ways: ssh username@hostname or cat < CLIscript.file > | ssh admin@hostname The script is run and the actions contained in the script are performed. Following are the points to remember, when you are trying to establish an SSH session to the device to run commands or script files: • • • • There is an upper limit of 10 concurrent sessions in SSH.
Configure the Management Port IP Address To access the system remotely, assign IP addresses to the management ports. 1. Enter INTERFACE mode for the Management port. CONFIGURATION mode interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2. Assign an IP address to the interface. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address/mask • • ip-address: an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). mask: a subnet mask in /prefix-length format (/ xx). 3. Enable the interface.
To configure an enable password, use the following command. • Create a password to access EXEC Privilege mode. CONFIGURATION mode enable [password | secret] [level level] [encryption-type] password ○ level: is the privilege level, is 15 by default, and is not required. ○ encryption-type: specifies how you input the password, is 0 by default, and is not required. ▪ ▪ ▪ 0 is to input the password in clear text. 5 is to input a password that is already encrypted using MD5 encryption method.
!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 26292881 bytes successfully copied Mounting an NFS File System This feature enables you to quickly access data on an NFS mounted file system. You can perform file operations on an NFS mounted file system using supported file commands. This feature allows an NFS mounted device to be recognized as a file system.
Example of Copying to NFS Mount Dell#copy flash://test.txt nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied Dell#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:/// Destination file name [test.txt]: ! 15 bytes successfully copied Dell#copy flash://test/capture.txt.pcap nfsmount:///username/snoop.pcap ! 24 bytes successfully copied Dell# Dell#copy tftp://10.16.127.
• View the running-configuration. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config • View the startup-configuration. EXEC Privilege mode show startup-config The output of the dir command also shows the read/write privileges, size (in bytes), and date of modification for each file.
Table 6. Standard and Compressed Configurations int vlan 2 int vlan 3 int vlan 4 int vlan 5 int vlan 100 int vlan 1000 no ip address tagged te 1/1 tagged te 1/1 tagged te 1/1 no ip address ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shut no ip address no ip address no ip address no shut no shut shut shut shut int te 1/1 int te 1/2 int te 1/3 int te 1/4 int te 1/10 int te 1/34 no ip address no ip address no ip address no ip address no ip address ip address 2.1.1.
Table 6. Standard and Compressed Configurations (continued) tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 4 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode.
The output of the show file-systems command in the following example shows the total capacity, amount of free memory, file structure, media type, read/write privileges for each storage device in use. Dell#show file-systems Size(b) Free(b) Feature Type Flags 520962048 213778432 dosFs2.0 USERFLASH 127772672 21936128 dosFs2.
[12/5 [12/5 [12/5 [12/5 [12/5 10:57:12]: 10:57:12]: 10:57:12]: 10:57:12]: 10:57:13]: CMD-(CLI):hostname Force10 CMD-(CLI):ip telnet server enable CMD-(CLI):line console 0 CMD-(CLI):line vty 0 9 CMD-(CLI):boot system rpm0 primary flash://FTOS-CB-1.1.1.2E2.bin Upgrading Dell Networking OS NOTE: To upgrade Dell Networking Operating System (OS), refer to the Release Notes for the version you want to load on the system.
SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 SHA256 hash VERIFIED for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin Using HTTP for File Transfers Stating with Release 9.3(0.1), you can use HTTP to copy files or configuration details to a remote server. To transfer files to an external server, use the copy source-file-url http://host[:port]/file-path command.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system.
Removing a Command from EXEC Mode To remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode for a specific privilege level, use the privilege exec command from CONFIGURATION mode. In the command, specify a level greater than the level given to a user or terminal line, then the first keyword of each command you wish to restrict.
privilege configure level level {interface | line | route-map | router} {command-keyword ||...|| command-keyword} • Allow access to a CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, LINE, ROUTE-MAP, and/or ROUTER mode command. CONFIGURATION mode privilege {configure |interface | line | route-map | router} level level {command ||...
Dell(conf)# interface group vlan 1 - 2 , tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,te-1/1)# no shutdown Dell(conf-if-group-vl-1-2,te-1/1)# end Applying a Privilege Level to a Username To set the user privilege level, use the following command. • Configure a privilege level for a user. CONFIGURATION mode username username privilege level Applying a Privilege Level to a Terminal Line To set a privilege level for a terminal line, use the following command. • Configure a privilege level for a user.
Enabling Audit and Security Logs You enable audit and security logs to monitor configuration changes or determine if these changes affect the operation of the system in the network. You log audit and security events to a system log server, using the logging extended command in CONFIGURATION mode. This command is available with or without RBAC enabled. For information about RBAC, see Role-Based Access Control. Audit Logs The audit log contains configuration events and information.
Clearing Audit Logs To clear audit logs, use the clear logging auditlog command in Exec mode. When RBAC is enabled, only the system administrator user role can issue this command. Example of the clear logging auditlog Command Dell# clear logging auditlog Configuring Logging Format To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the logging version {0 | 1} command in CONFIGURATION mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
%IFMGR-5-CSTATE_UP: changed interface Physical state to up: So 12/8 %IFMGR-5-CSTATE_DN: changed interface Physical state to down: So 12/8 To view any changes made, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode. Setting Up a Secure Connection to a Syslog Server You can use reverse tunneling with the port forwarding to securely connect to a syslog server. Figure 2.
If you do not, the system displays an error when you attempt to enable role-based only AAA authorization. Dell(conf)# logging localhost tcp port Dell(conf)#logging 127.0.0.1 tcp 5140 Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP.
Display Login Statistics To view the login statistics, use the show login statistics command. Example of the show login statistics Command The show login statistics command displays the successful and failed login details of the current user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. Dell#show login statistics -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.143 ) Unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login: 0 Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 0 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 1 -----------------------------------------------------------------The following is sample output of the show login statistics unsuccessful-attempts command.
Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command. CONFIGURATION mode login concurrent-session clear-line enable The following example enables you to clear your existing login sessions.
Disabling System Logging By default, logging is enabled and log messages are sent to the logging buffer, all terminal lines, the console, and the syslog servers. To disable system logging, use the following commands. • Disable all logging except on the console. CONFIGURATION mode no logging on • Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer • Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor • Disable console logging.
• Specify the minimum severity level for logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode logging monitor level • Specify the minimum severity level for logging to a syslog server. CONFIGURATION mode logging trap level • Specify the minimum severity level for logging to the syslog history table. CONFIGURATION mode logging history level • Specify the size of the logging buffer.
%CHMGR-5-LINECARDUP: Line card 5 is up %CHMGR-5-CHECKIN: Checkin from line card 12 (type S12YC12, 12 ports) %TSM-6-PORT_CONFIG: Port link status for LC 12 => portpipe 0: OK portpipe 1: N/A %CHMGR-5-LINECARDUP: Line card 12 is up %IFMGR-5-CSTATE_UP: changed interface Physical state to up: So 12/8 %IFMGR-5-CSTATE_DN: changed interface Physical state to down: So 12/8 To view any changes made, use the show running-config logging command in EXEC privilege mode.
Synchronizing Log Messages You can configure Dell Networking OS to filter and consolidate the system messages for a specific line by synchronizing the message output. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level appear. This feature works on the terminal and console connections available on the system. 1. Enter LINE mode.
NOTE: To transmit large files, Dell Networking recommends configuring the switch as an FTP server. Configuration Task List for File Transfer Services The configuration tasks for file transfer services are: • • • Enable FTP Server (mandatory) Configure FTP Server Parameters (optional) Configure FTP Client Parameters (optional) Enabling the FTP Server To enable the system as an FTP server, use the following command. To view FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode.
○ For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp source-interface interface • Configure a password. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp password password • Enter a username to use on the FTP client. CONFIGURATION mode ip ftp username name To view the FTP configuration, use the show running-config ftp command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Enable FTP Server.
line vty 0 access-class myvtyacl Dell(conf-ipv6-acl)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended testdeny seq 10 deny ip 30.1.1.
Dell(config-line-vty)#show config line vty 0 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 1 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist line vty 2 password myvtypassword login authentication myvtymethodlist Dell(config-line-vty)# Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands.
FreeBSD/i386 (freebsd2.force10networks.com) (ttyp1) login: admin Dell# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. • • Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode.
• • When you restore the units in standalone mode, the units remain in standalone mode after the restoration. After the restore is complete, the units power cycle immediately. The following example illustrates the restore factory-defaults command to restore the factory default settings.
=> setenv ipaddr ip_address For example, 10.16.150.105. => setenv netmask mask For example, 255.255.0.0. 5. Assign an IP address as the default gateway for the system. uBoot mode => setenv gatewayip gateway_ip_address For example, 10.16.150.254. 6. Save the modified environmental variables. uBoot mode => saveenv 7. Reload the system.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • • • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
4. The authentication server replies with an Access-Challenge frame. The Access-Challenge frame requests the supplicant to prove that it is who it claims to be, using a specified method (an EAP-Method). The challenge is translated and forwarded to the supplicant by the authenticator. 5.
Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.1X-triggered Access-Request messages: Attribute 31 Calling-station-id: relays the supplicant MAC address to the authentication server. Attribute 41 NAS-Port-Type: NAS-port physical port type. 15 indicates Ethernet. Attribute 61 NAS-Port: the physical port number by which the authenticator is connected to the supplicant.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1. Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2. Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3. Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Verify that 802.1X is enabled globally and at the interface level using the show running-config | find dot1x command from EXEC Privilege mode.
dot1x authentication no shutdown ! Dell# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. Dell#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
Configuring a Quiet Period after a Failed Authentication If the supplicant fails the authentication process, the authenticator sends another Request Identity frame after 30 seconds by default. You can configure this period. NOTE: The quiet period (dot1x quiet-period) is the transmit interval after a failed authentication; the Request Identity Re-transmit interval (dot1x tx-period) is for an unresponsive supplicant. To configure a quiet period, use the following command.
The bold line shows the new port-control state. Dell(conf-if-Te-1/1)#dot1x port-control force-authorized Dell(conf-if-Te-1/1)#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 802.
Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authentication server is unresponsive, the authenticator terminates the authentication process after 30 seconds by default. You can configure the amount of time the authenticator waits for a response.
Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication Dell Networking OS supports dynamic VLAN assignment when using 802.1X. The basis for VLAN assignment is RADIUS attribute 81, Tunnel-Private-Group-ID. Dynamic VLAN assignment uses the standard dot1x procedure: 1. The host sends a dot1x packet to the Dell Networking system 2. The system forwards a RADIUS REQEST packet containing the host MAC address and ingress port number 3.
Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Typically, the authenticator (the Dell system) denies the supplicant access to the network until the supplicant is authenticated. If the supplicant is authenticated, the authenticator enables the port and places it in either the VLAN for which the port is configured or the VLAN that the authentication server indicates in the authentication data. NOTE: Ports cannot be dynamically assigned to the default VLAN.
Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)# View your configuration using the show config command from INTERFACE mode, as shown in the example in Configuring a Guest VLAN or using the show dot1x interface command from EXEC Privilege mode. Example of Viewing Configured Authentication 802.
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements.
Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN Groups Keep the following points in mind when you configure ACL VLAN groups: • • • • • • • • • • The interfaces where you apply the ACL VLAN group function as restricted interfaces. The ACL VLAN group name identifies the group of VLANs that performs hierarchical filtering. You can add only one ACL to an interface at a time. When you attach an ACL VLAN group to the same interface, validation performs to determine whether the ACL is applied directly to an interface.
show acl-vlan-group {group name | detail} Dell#show acl-vlan-group detail Group Name : TestGroupSeventeenTwenty Egress IP Acl : SpecialAccessOnlyExpertsAllowed Vlan Members : 100,200,300 Group Name : CustomerNumberIdentificationEleven Egress IP Acl : AnyEmployeeCustomerElevenGrantedAccess Vlan Members : 2-10,99 Group Name : HostGroup Egress IP Acl : Group5 Vlan Members : 1,1000 Dell# Configuring FP Blocks for VLAN Parameters To allocate the number of FP blocks for the various VLAN processes on the system,
The following output shows CAM blocks usage for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs and other processes that use CAM space: Dell#show cam-usage Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============|============== 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | 1023 | | IN-L3 FIB | 49152 | 3 | 49149 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | IN-NLB ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | IPMAC ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 | | OUT-L3 ACL |
The following output displays CAM space usage for Layer 3 ACLs: Dell#show cam-usage router Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|=============|=============|============== 1 | 0 | IN-L3 FIB | 49152 | 3 | 49149 | | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | 1023 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | OUT-L3 ACL | 178 | 9 | 169 | | OUT-V6 ACL | 178 | 4 | 174 2 | 0 | IN-L3 FIB | 49152 | 3 | 49149 | | IN-L3 ACL | 1024 | 1 | 1023 | | IN-V6 ACL | 0 | 0 | 0 | | OUT-L3 ACL |
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
• • • • • • • • • Applying an IP ACL Configure Ingress ACLs Configure Egress ACLs IP Prefix Lists ACL Resequencing Route Maps Logging of ACL Processes Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs Configuring UDF ACL IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) In Dell Networking switch/routers, you can create two different types of IP ACLs: standard or extended. A standard ACL filters packets based on the source IP packet.
Test CAM Usage This command applies to both IPv4 and IPv6 CAM profiles, but is best used when verifying QoS optimization for IPv6 ACLs. To determine whether sufficient ACL CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use this command. To verify the actual CAM space required, create a class map with all the required ACL rules, then execute the test cam-usage command in Privilege mode. The following example shows the output when executing this command.
Example of the order Keyword to Determine ACL Sequence Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl1 Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.0.0.0/8 Dell(config-std-nacl)#exit Dell(conf)#ip access-list standard acl2 Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 20.1.1.
To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTE-MAP mode. Dell(config-route-map)#show config ! route-map dilling permit 10 Dell(config-route-map)# You can create multiple instances of this route map by using the sequence number option to place the route maps in the correct order. Dell Networking OS processes the route maps with the lowest sequence number first.
Example of the match Command to Match Any of Several Values The following example shows using the match command to match any of several values. Dell(conf)#route-map force permit 10 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 2000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 3000 In the next example, there is a match only if a route has both of the specified characteristics. In this example, there a match only if the route has a tag value of 1000 and a metric value of 2000.
match ipv6 address prefix-list-name • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ipv6 next-hop {access-list-name | prefix-list prefix-list-name} • Match source routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4).
CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set next-hop ip-address • Assign an IPv6 address as the route’s next hop. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set ipv6 next-hop ip-address • Assign an ORIGIN attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set origin {egp | igp | incomplete} • Specify a tag for the redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set tag tag-value • Specify a value as the route’s weight. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set weight value To create route map instances, use these commands.
Example of the redistribute Command Using a Route Tag ! router rip redistribute ospf 34 metric 1 route-map torip ! route-map torip permit 10 match route-type internal set tag 34 ! Continue Clause Normally, when a match is found, set clauses are executed, and the packet is then forwarded; no more route-map modules are processed. If you configure the continue command at the end of a module, the next module (or a specified module) is processed even after a match is found.
Example of Denying Second and Subsequent Fragments Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#deny ip any 10.1.1.1/32 fragments Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit ip any 10.1.1.1/32 Dell(conf-ext-nacl) Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples The following examples show the ACL commands for Layer 4 packet filtering. Permit an ACL line with L3 information only, and the fragments keyword is present: If a packet’s L3 information matches the L3 information in the ACL line, the packet's FO is checked.
A standard IP ACL uses the source IP address as its match criterion. 1. Enter IP ACCESS LIST mode by naming a standard IP access list. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard access-listname 2. Configure a drop or forward filter. CONFIG-STD-NACL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte] [dscp] [order] [fragments] NOTE: When assigning sequence numbers to filters, keep in mind that you might need to insert a new filter.
were configured (for example, the first filter was given the lowest sequence number). The show config command in IP ACCESS LIST mode displays the two filters with the sequence numbers 5 and 10. Dell(config-route-map)#ip access standard kigali Dell(config-std-nacl)#permit 10.1.0.0/16 Dell(config-std-nacl)#show config ! ip access-list standard kigali seq 5 permit 10.1.0.0/16 Dell(config-std-nacl)# To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] Configure Filters, UDP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1. Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2. Configure an extended IP ACL filter for UDP packets.
seq 10 permit udp 154.44.0.0 0.0.255.255 host 34.6.0.0 Dell(config-ext-nacl)# To view all configured IP ACLs and the number of packets processed through the ACL, use the show ip accounting accesslist command in EXEC Privilege mode, as shown in the first example in Configure a Standard IP ACL Filter. Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs Both Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs may be configured on an interface in Layer 2 mode.
interface interface slot/port 2. Configure an IP address for the interface, placing it in Layer-3 mode. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3. Apply an IP ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface. INTERFACE mode ip access-group access-list-name {in} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-range | vrf vrf-range] NOTE: The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your line card documentation. 4. Apply rules to the new ACL.
Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended abcd Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit tcp any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#deny icmp any any Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit 1.1.1.2 Dell(config-ext-nacl)#end Dell#show ip accounting access-list ! Extended Ingress IP access list abcd on tengigabitethernet 1/1 seq 5 permit tcp any any seq 10 deny icmp any any seq 15 permit 1.1.1.2 Configure Egress ACLs Egress ACLs are applied to line cards and affect the traffic leaving the system.
Applying Egress Layer 3 ACLs (Control-Plane) By default, packets originated from the system are not filtered by egress ACLs. For example, if you initiate a ping session from the system and apply an egress ACL to block this type of traffic on the interface, the ACL does not affect that ping traffic. The Control Plane Egress Layer 3 ACL feature enhances IP reachability debugging by implementing control-plane ACLs for CPU-generated and CPU-forwarded traffic.
Configuration Task List for Prefix Lists To configure a prefix list, use commands in PREFIX LIST, ROUTER RIP, ROUTER OSPF, and ROUTER BGP modes. Create the prefix list in PREFIX LIST mode and assign that list to commands in ROUTER RIP, ROUTER OSPF and ROUTER BGP modes. The following list includes the configuration tasks for prefix lists, as described in the following sections.
The optional parameters are: • • ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32). le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32). The example shows a prefix list in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software. The filters were assigned sequence numbers based on the order in which they were configured (for example, the first filter was given the lowest sequence number).
• Enter RIP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router rip • Apply a configured prefix list to incoming routes. You can specify an interface. If you enter the name of a nonexistent prefix list, all routes are forwarded. CONFIG-ROUTER-RIP mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Apply a configured prefix list to outgoing routes. You can specify an interface or type of route. If you enter the name of a non-existent prefix list, all routes are forwarded.
You can resequence IPv4 and IPv6 ACLs, prefixes, and MAC ACLs. No CAM writes happen as a result of resequencing, so there is no packet loss; the behavior is similar Hot-lock ACLs. NOTE: ACL resequencing does not affect the rules, remarks, or order in which they are applied. Resequencing merely renumbers the rules so that you can place new rules within the list as needed. Table 8. ACL Resequencing Rules Resquencing Rules Before Resequencing: seq 5 permit any host 1.1.1.1 seq 6 permit any host 1.1.1.
seq 10 permit ip any host 1.1.1.3 seq 12 permit ip any host 1.1.1.4 Remarks that do not have a corresponding rule are incremented as a rule. These two mechanisms allow remarks to retain their original position in the list. The following example shows remark 10 corresponding to rule 10 and as such, they have the same number before and after the command is entered. Remark 4 is incremented as a rule, and all rules have retained their original positions.
interval of 5 minutes is used. Similarly, if you do not specify the threshold for ACL logs, a default threshold of 10 is used, where this value refers to the number of packets that are matched against an ACL . A Layer 2 or Layer 3 ACL contains a set of defined rules that are saved as flow processor (FP) entries. When you enable ACL logging for a particular ACL rule, a set of specific ACL rules translate to a set of FP entries.
NOTE: This example describes the configuration of ACL logging for standard IP access lists. You can enable the logging capability for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and standard and extended MAC ACLs. 1. Specify the maximum number of ACL logs or the threshold that can be generated by using the threshold-in-msgs count option with the seq, permit, or deny commands. Upon exceeding the specified maximum limit, the generation of ACL logs is terminated.
The port mirroring application maintains a database that contains all monitoring sessions (including port monitor sessions). It has information regarding the sessions that are enabled for flow-based monitoring and those sessions that are not enabled for flow-based monitoring. It downloads monitoring configuration to the ACL agent whenever the ACL agent is registered with the port mirroring application or when flow-based monitoring is enabled.
To view an access-list that you applied to an interface, use the show ip accounting access-list command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#flow-based enable Dell(conf)#ip access-list ext testflow Dell(config-ext-nacl)#seq 5 permit icmp any any count bytes monitor Dell(config-ext-nacl)#seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 2 2 0 2 1 0 0 0 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 256 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 2 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 2 FcoeAcl : 4 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 1 8(UdfEnabled) 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
match l2ethertype ipv4 ipprotocol value vlantag tagStatus Dell(conf-udf-tcam)#match l2ethertype ipv4 ipprotocol 4 vlantag any 8. View the UDF TCAM configuration. CONFIGURATION-UDF TCAM mode show config Dell(conf-udf-tcam)#show config ! udf-tcam ipnip seq 1 match l2ethertype ipv4 ipprotocol 4 vlantag any Dell(conf-udf-tcam)# 9. Create a UDF qualifier to assign values to UDF IDs. CONFIGURATION-UDF TCAM mode udf-qualifier-value name Dell(conf-udf-tcam)# udf-qualifier-value ipnip_val1 10.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface. Desired Min TX Interval The minimum rate at which the local system would like to send control packets to the remote system.
State Description Up Both systems are exchanging control packets. The session is declared down if: • • • A control packet is not received within the detection time. Sufficient echo packets are lost. Demand mode is active and a control packet is not received in response to a poll packet. BFD Three-Way Handshake A three-way handshake must take place between the systems that participate in the BFD session.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet. When you enable BFD, the local system removes the route as soon as it stops receiving periodic control packets from the remote system.
CONFIGURATION mode interface 2. Assign an IP address to the interface if one is not already assigned. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address 3. Identify the neighbor that the interface participates with the BFD session. INTERFACE mode bfd neighbor ip-address To verify that the session is established, use the show bfd neighbors command. The bold line shows the BFD session.
Example of Viewing Session Parameters R1(conf-if-te-4/24)#bfd interval 100 min_rx 100 multiplier 4 role passive R1(conf-if-te-4/24)#do show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:09:c3:e5 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
3. Configure an IP route to connect BFD on the static routes using the ip route bfd command. Related Configuration Tasks • • Changing Static Route Session Parameters Disabling BFD for Static Routes Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions for Static Routes To establish a BFD session, use the following command.
ip route bfd interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down packet is sent to all neighbors on the remote systems, and those neighbors change to the Down state. To disable BFD for static routes, use the following command.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPF neighbors.
I O R - ISIS - OSPF - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.2.2 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O * 2.2.3.1 2.2.3.2 Te 2/2 Up 100 100 3 O Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: desired tx interval, required min rx interval, detection multiplier, and system role.
Establishing Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors You can establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors at once or with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPFv3 adjacency is in the Full state. To establish BFD with all OSPFv3 neighbors or with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors. ROUTER-OSPFv3 mode bfd all-neighbors • Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface.
Related Configuration Tasks • • Changing IS-IS Session Parameters Disabling BFD for IS-IS Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 15. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors.
O R - OSPF - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
For example, the following illustration shows a sample BFD configuration on Router 1 and Router 2 that use eBGP in a transit network to interconnect AS1 and AS2. The eBGP routers exchange information with each other as well as with iBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility within each autonomous system. Figure 16.
CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group name} remote-as as-number 4. Enable the BGP neighbor. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} no shutdown 5. Configure parameters for a BFD session established with all neighbors discovered by BGP. OR Establish a BFD session with a specified BGP neighbor or peer group using the default BFD session parameters.
Displaying BFD for BGP Information You can display related information for BFD for BGP. To display information about BFD for BGP sessions on a router, use the following commands and refer to the following examples. • Verify a BFD for BGP configuration. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config bgp • Verify that a BFD for BGP session has been successfully established with a BGP neighbor. A line-by-line listing of established BFD adjacencies is displayed.
Configured parameters: TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3 Neighbor parameters: TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3 Actual parameters: TX: 100ms, RX: 100ms, Multiplier: 3 Role: Active Delete session on Down: True Client Registered: BGP Uptime: 00:07:55 Statistics: Number of packets received from neighbor: 4762 Number of packets sent to neighbor: 4490 Number of state changes: 2 Number of messages from IFA about port state change: 0 Number of messages communicated b/w Manager and Agent: 5 Session Discriminato
Registration De-registration Init Up Down Admin Down : : : : : : 1 0 0 1 0 2 The following example shows viewing BFD summary information. The bold line shows the message displayed when you enable BFD for BGP connections. R2# show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 10.0.0.
R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.3 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.3, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP neighbor mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.4, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 17. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
LocalAddr RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients * 2.2.5.1 2.2.5.2 Te 4/25 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session. Dell(conf-if-te-4/25)#do show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 4/1, VRID: 1, Net: 2.2.5.1 VRF:0 default State: Backup, Priority: 1, Master: 2.2.5.
Configuring Protocol Liveness Protocol liveness is a feature that notifies the BFD manager when a client protocol is disabled. When you disable a client, all BFD sessions for that protocol are torn down. Neighbors on the remote system receive an Admin Down control packet and are placed in the Down state. To enable protocol liveness, use the following command. • Enable Protocol Liveness.
The output for the debug bfd event command is the same as the log messages that appear on the console by default.
9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
Figure 18. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network. Updates traveling through the network and returning to the same node are easily detected and discarded.
Figure 19. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
State Description Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state. OpenSent After successful OpenSent transition, the router sends an Open message and waits for one in return.
1. Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2. Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B. 3.
Figure 21. BGP Best Path Selection Best Path Selection Details 1. Prefer the path with the largest WEIGHT attribute. 2. Prefer the path with the largest LOCAL_PREF attribute. 3. Prefer the path that was locally Originated via a network command, redistribute command or aggregate-address command. a. Routes originated with the Originated via a network or redistribute commands are preferred over routes originated with the aggregate-address command. 4.
a. if the Router-ID is the same for multiple paths (because the routes were received from the same route) skip this step. b. if the Router-ID is NOT the same for multiple paths, prefer the path that was first received as the Best Path. The path selection algorithm returns without performing any of the checks detailed here. 11. Prefer the external path originated from the BGP router with the lowest router ID. If both paths are external, prefer the oldest path (first received path).
Figure 22. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path. MED is one of the criteria used to determine the best path, so keep in mind that other criteria may impact selection, as shown in the illustration in Best Path Selection Criteria. One AS assigns the MED a value and the other AS uses that value to decide the preferred path.
Figure 23. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
Example of Viewing AS Paths Dell#show ip bgp paths Total 30655 Paths Address Hash Refcount Metric 0x4014154 0 3 18508 0x4013914 0 3 18508 0x5166d6c 0 3 18508 0x5e62df4 0 2 18508 0x3a1814c 0 26 18508 0x567ea9c 0 75 18508 0x6cc1294 0 2 18508 0x6cc18d4 0 1 18508 0x5982e44 0 162 18508 0x67d4a14 0 2 18508 0x559972c 0 31 18508 0x59cd3b4 0 2 18508 0x7128114 0 10 18508 0x536a914 0 3 18508 0x2ffe884 0 1 18508 Path 701 3549 19421 i 701 7018 14990 i 209 4637 1221 9249 9249 i 701 17302 i 209 22291 i 209 3356 2529 i 20
path becomes unavailable, the BGP speaker withdraws its path from its local RIB and recalculates a new best path. This situation requires both IGP and BGP convergence and can be a lengthy process. BGP add-path also helps switchover to the next new best path when the current best path is unavailable. Advertise IGP Cost as MED for Redistributed Routes When using multipath connectivity to an external AS, you can advertise the MED value selectively to each peer for redistributed routes.
Traditional Format DOT Format 65536 1.0 100000 1.34464 4294967295 65535.65535 When creating Confederations, all the routers in a Confederation must be either 4-Byte or 2-Byte identified routers. You cannot mix them. Configure 4-byte AS numbers with the four-octet-support command. AS4 Number Representation Dell Networking OS supports multiple representations of 4-byte AS numbers: asplain, asdot+, and asdot.
Figure 24. Before and After AS Number Migration with Local-AS Enabled When you complete your migration, and you have reconfigured your network with the new information, disable this feature. If you use the “no prepend” option, the Local-AS does not prepend to the updates received from the eBGP peer. If you do not select “no prepend” (the default), the Local-AS is added to the first AS segment in the AS-PATH.
Important Points to Remember • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Because eBGP packets are not controlled by the ACL, packets from BGP neighbors cannot be blocked using the deny ip command. The f10BgpM2AsPathTableEntry table, f10BgpM2AsPathSegmentIndex, and f10BgpM2AsPathElementIndex are used to retrieve a particular ASN from the AS path. These indices are assigned to the AS segments and individual ASN in each segment starting from 0.
• delayed configuration (the software at system boot reads the entire configuration file prior to sending messages to start BGP peer sessions) The following are not yet supported: • • auto-summarization (the default is no auto-summary) synchronization (the default is no synchronization) BGP Configuration To enable the BGP process and begin exchanging information, assign an AS number and use commands in ROUTER BGP mode to configure a BGP neighbor. By default, BGP is disabled.
an EBGP neighbor is usually the IP address of the interface directly connected to the router. First, the BGP process determines if all internal BGP peers are reachable, then it determines which peers outside the AS are reachable. NOTE: Sample Configurations for enabling BGP routers are found at the end of this chapter. 1. Assign an AS number and enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number • as-number: from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte) or from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte) or 0.1 to 65535.
1 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 72 bytes of memory 1 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 47 bytes of memory 5 neighbor(s) using 23520 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 10.10.21.1 10.10.32.3 100.10.92.9 192.168.10.1 192.168.12.
Last reset never Local host: 10.114.8.39, Local port: 1037 Foreign host: 10.114.8.60, Foreign port: 179 BGP neighbor is 10.1.1.1, remote AS 65535, internal link Administratively shut down BGP version 4, remote router ID 10.0.0.
Only one form of AS number representation is supported at a time. You cannot combine the types of representations within an AS. To configure AS4 number representations, use the following commands. • Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. • Enable ASDOT AS Number representation.
A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it. For information about configuring route policies for a peer group, refer to Filtering BGP Routes. NOTE: Sample Configurations for enabling peer groups are found at the end of this chapter. 1. Create a peer group by assigning a name to it. CONFIG-ROUTERBGP mode neighbor peer-group-name peer-group 2.
When you create a peer group, it is disabled (shutdown). The following example shows the creation of a peer group (zanzibar) (in bold). Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor zanzibar peer-group Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 45 bgp fast-external-fallover bgp log-neighbor-changes neighbor zanzibar peer-group neighbor zanzibar shutdown neighbor 10.1.1.1 remote-as 65535 neighbor 10.1.1.1 shutdown neighbor 10.14.8.60 remote-as 18505 neighbor 10.14.8.
10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.1 10.68.184.1 10.68.185.1 Dell> Configuring BGP Fast Fall-Over By default, a BGP session is governed by the hold time. BGP routers typically carry large routing tables, so frequent session resets are not desirable. The BGP fast fall-over feature reduces the convergence time while maintaining stability. The connection to a BGP peer is immediately reset if a link to a directly connected external peer fails.
Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 5 Recv: 0 Local host: 200.200.200.200, Local port: 65519 Foreign host: 100.100.100.100, Foreign port: 179 Dell# To verify that fast fall-over is enabled on a peer-group, use the show ip bgp peer-group command (shown in bold).
Only after the peer group responds to an OPEN message sent on the subnet does its BGP state change to ESTABLISHED. After the peer group is ESTABLISHED, the peer group is the same as any other peer group. For more information about peer groups, refer to Configure Peer Groups. Maintaining Existing AS Numbers During an AS Migration The local-as feature smooths out the BGP network migration operation and allows you to maintain existing ASNs during a BGP network migration.
○ Number: 1 through 10. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. The lines shown in bold are the number of times ASN 65123 can appear in the AS path (allows–in 9). To disable this feature, use the no neighbor allow-as in number command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. R2(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.
• Set maximum restart time for all peers. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [restart-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart as a receiver only.
{deny | permit} filter parameter This is the filter that is used to match the AS-path. The entries can be any format, letters, numbers, or regular expressions. You can enter this command multiple times if multiple filters are desired. For accepted expressions, refer to Regular Expressions as Filters. 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Use a configured AS-PATH ACL for route filtering and manipulation.
Regular Expression Definition * (asterisk) Matches 0 or more sequences of the immediately previous character or pattern. + (plus) Matches 1 or more sequences of the immediately previous character or pattern. ? (question) Matches 0 or 1 sequence of the immediately previous character or pattern.
Redistributing Routes In addition to filtering routes, you can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the BGP process. With the redistribute command, you can include ISIS, OSPF, static, or directly connected routes in the BGP process. To add routes from other routing instances or protocols, use any of the following commands in ROUTER BGP mode. • Include, directly connected or user-configured (static) routes in BGP.
IETF RFC 1997 defines the COMMUNITY attribute and the predefined communities of INTERNET, NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED, NO_ADVERTISE, and NO_EXPORT. All BGP routes belong to the INTERNET community. In the RFC, the other communities are defined as follows: • All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community attribute are not sent to CONFED-EBGP or EBGP peers, but are sent to IBGP peers within CONFED-SUB-AS. All routes with the NO_ADVERTISE (0xFFFFFF02) community attribute must not be advertised.
CONFIG-COMMUNITY-LIST mode {permit | deny} {{rt | soo} {ASN:NN | IPADDR:N} | regex REGEX-LINE} Filter routes based on the type of extended communities they carry using one of the following keywords: • • • rt: route target. soo: route origin or site-of-origin. Support for matching extended communities against regular expression is also supported. Match against a regular expression using the following keyword. regexp: regular expression.
To view which BGP routes meet an IP community or IP extended community list’s criteria, use the show ip bgp {community-list | extcommunity-list} command in EXEC Privilege mode. Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute In addition to permitting or denying routes based on the values of the COMMUNITY attributes, you can manipulate the COMMUNITY attribute value and send the COMMUNITY attribute with the route information. By default, Dell Networking OS does not send the COMMUNITY attribute.
* i 3.0.0.0/8 *>i 4.2.49.12/30 * i 4.21.132.0/23 *>i 4.24.118.16/30 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.0/30 *>i 6.1.0.0/16 *>i 6.2.0.0/22 *>i 6.3.0.0/18 *>i 6.4.0.0/16 *>i 6.5.0.0/19 *>i 6.8.0.0/20 *>i 6.9.0.0/20 *>i 6.10.0.0/15 *>i 6.14.0.0/15 *>i 6.133.0.0/21 *>i 6.151.0.0/16 --More-- 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.0.16 195.171.
set local-preference value 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Apply the route map to the neighbor or peer group’s incoming or outgoing routes. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} route-map map-name {in | out} To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Enabling Multipath By default, the software allows one path to a destination. You can enable multipath to allow up to 64 parallel paths to a destination. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow more than one path, use the following command. The show ip bgp network command includes multipath information for that network. • Enable multiple parallel paths.
neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} Configure the following parameters: • • • • ip-address or peer-group-name: enter the neighbor’s IP address or the peer group’s name. prefix-list-name: enter the name of a configured prefix list. in: apply the prefix list to inbound routes. out: apply the prefix list to outbound routes. As a reminder, the following are rules concerning prefix lists: • • • If the prefix list contains no filters, all routes are permitted.
AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4. Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5. Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} filter-list as-path-name {in | out} Configure the following parameters: • • • • ip-address or peer-group-name: enter the neighbor’s IP address or the peer group’s name.
CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode aggregate-address ip-address mask [advertise-map map-name] [as-set] [attribute-map map-name] [summary-only] [suppress-map map-name] In the show ip bgp command, aggregates contain an ‘a’ in the first column (shown in bold) and routes suppressed by the aggregate contain an ‘s’ in the first column. Dell#show ip bgp BGP table version is 0, local router ID is 10.101.15.
• Attribute change When dampening is applied to a route, its path is described by one of the following terms: • • • history entry — an entry that stores information on a downed route dampened path — a path that is no longer advertised penalized path — a path that is assigned a penalty To configure route flap dampening parameters, set dampening parameters using a route map, clear information on route dampening and return suppressed routes to active state, view statistics on route flapping, or change the
NOTE: When you change the best path selection method, path selection for existing paths remains unchanged until you reset it by entering the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following example shows how to configure values to reuse or restart a route.
timers bgp keepalive holdtime ○ keepalive: the range is from 1 to 65535. Time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The default is 60 seconds. ○ holdtime: the range is from 3 to 65536. Time interval, in seconds, between the last keepalive message and declaring the router dead. The default is 180 seconds. To view non-default values, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Route Map Continue The BGP route map continue feature, continue [sequence-number], (in ROUTE-MAP mode) allows movement from one routemap entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify a sequence number, the continue feature moves to the next sequence number (also known as an “implied continue”). If a match clause exists, the continue feature executes only after a successful match occurs. If there are no successful matches, continue is ignored.
BGP Regular Expression Optimization Dell Networking OS optimizes processing time when using regular expressions by caching and re-using regular expression evaluated results, at the expense of some memory in RP1 processor. BGP policies that contain regular expressions to match against as-paths and communities might take a lot of CPU processing time, thus affect BGP routing convergence.
Example of the show ip bgp neighbor Command to View Last and Bad PDUs Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp neighbors 1.1.1.2 BGP neighbor is 1.1.1.2, remote AS 2, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 2.4.0.
To change the maximum buffer size, use the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command. To view the captured PDUs, use the show capture bgp-pdu neighbor command. Dell#show capture bgp-pdu neighbor 20.20.20.2 Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.
The following illustration shows the configurations described on the following examples. These configurations show how to create BGP areas using physical and virtual links. They include setting up the interfaces and peers groups with each other. Figure 25. Sample Configurations Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote 100 R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.
R3(conf-if-te-3/11)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/11 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.0/24 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.
ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1, neighbor version 1 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:00:57, due to user reset Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago ffffffff ffffffff fffffff
192.168.128.1 99 140 136 2 0 (0) 00:11:24 1 192.168.128.3 100 138 140 2 0 (0) 00:18:31 1 Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 3) R3#conf R3(conf)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 peer-group BBB R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
122 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 140 messages, 0 in queue Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) 195
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies.
Table 11. Default Cam Allocation Settings (continued) CAM Allocation Setting fedgovacl 0 NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 1024 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 1024 entries. Select 2 to configure 2048 entries.
cam-acl {default | l2acl number ipv4acl number ipv6acl number ipv4qos number l2qos number l2pt number ipmacacl number vman-qos | vman-dual-qos number ecfmacl number nlbcluster number ipv4pbr number openflow number | fcoe number iscsioptacl number [vrfv4acl number] NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3. Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4. Reload the system.
IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 0 0 Dell(conf)# NOTE: If you change the cam-acl setting from CONFIGURATION mode, the output of this command does not reflect any changes until you save the running-configuration and reload the chassis.
VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dell# View CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each ACL partition using the show cam-usage command from EXEC Privilege mode.
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 27. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Topics: • Configure Control Plane Policing Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS). The basics for creating a CoPP service policy are to create a Layer 2, Layer 3, and/or an IPv6 ACL rule for the desired protocol type. Then, create a QoS input policy to rate-limit the protocol traffics according to the ACL.
Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-icmp cpu-qos Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit icmp Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list ipv6-vrrp cpu-qos Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit vrrp Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the QoS input policy.
2. Create an input policy-map to assign the QoS policy to the desired service queues.l. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map--input name cpu-qos service-queue queue-number qos-policy name 3. Enter Control Plane mode. CONFIGURATION mode control-plane-cpuqos 4. Assign a CPU queue-based service policy on the control plane in cpu-qos mode. Enabling this command sets the queue rates according to those configured.
are shared to multiple protocols. So, increasing the number of CMIC queues will reduce the contention among the protocols for the queue bandwidth. Currently, there are 4 Queues for data and 4 for control in both front-end and back-plane ports. In stacked systems, the control streams that reach standby or slave units will be tunneled through the backplane ports across stack-units to reach the CPU of the master unit.
• ○ VLT peer routing enable cases each VLT node will have route entry for link local address of both self and peer VLT node. Peer VLT link local entry will have egress port as ICL link. And Actual link local address will have entry to CopyToCpu. But NDP packets destined to peer VLT node needs to be taken to CPU and tunneled to the peer VLT node.. NDP packets in VLT peer routing disable case ○ NDP packets intended to peer VLT chassis taken to CPU and tunnel to peer.
To configure control-plane policing, perform the following: 1. Create an IPv6 ACL for control-plane traffic policing for ospfv3. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#ipv6 access-list ospfv3 cpu-qos Dell(conf-ipv6-acl-cpuqos)#permit ospf 2. Create a QoS input policy for the router and assign the policing. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#qos-policy-input ospfv3_rate cpu-qos Dell(conf-in-qos-policy-cpuqos)#rate-police 1500 16 peak 1500 16 3.
UDP (DHCP-R) TCP (FTP) ICMP IGMP TCP (MSDP) UDP (NTP) OSPF PIM UDP (RIP) TCP (SSH) TCP (TELNET) VRRP Dell# 67 any any any any/639 any any any any any any any 67 21 any any 639/any 123 any any 520 22 23 any _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Q6 Q6 Q6 Q7 Q6 Q6 Q7 Q7 Q7 Q6 Q6 Q7 CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ To view the queue mapping for the MAC protocols, use the show mac protocol-queue-mapping command.
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
Traffic Description LAN traffic LAN traffic consists of many flows that are insensitive to latency requirements, while certain applications, such as streaming video, are more sensitive to latency. Ethernet functions as a best-effort network that may drop packets in the case of network congestion.
• iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • • • • • • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface. However, only two lossless queues are supported on an interface: one for Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) converged traffic and one for Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) storage traffic. Configure the same lossless queues on all ports.
• ○ PFC enabled or disabled ○ No bandwidth limit or no ETS processing ETS uses the DCB MIB IEEE 802.1azd2.5. Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol (DCBx) DCBx allows a switch to automatically discover DCB-enabled peers and exchange configuration information. PFC and ETS use DCBx to exchange and negotiate parameters with peer devices. DCBx capabilities include: • • • Discovery of DCB capabilities on peer-device connections. Determination of possible mismatch in DCB configuration on a peer link.
For DCB to operate effectively, you can classify ingress traffic according to its dot1p priority so that it maps to different data queues. The dot1p-queue assignments used are shown in the following table. To enable DCB, enable either the iSCSI optimization configuration or the FCoE configuration. To enable DCB with PFC buffers on a switch, enter the following commands, save the configuration, and reboot the system to allow the changes to take effect. 1. Enable DCB. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable 2.
Data Center Bridging: Default Configuration Before you configure PFC and ETS on a switch see the priority group setting taken into account the following default settings: DCB is enabled. PFC and ETS are globally enabled by default. The default dot1p priority-queue assignments are applied as follows: Dell(conf)#do show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 Dell(conf)# PFC is not applied on specific dot1p priorities.
Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface when PFC mode is turned off. Prerequisite: A DCB with PFC configuration is applied to the interface with the following conditions: • • PFC mode is off (no pfc mode on). No PFC priority classes are configured (no pfc priority priority-range). Example: Port A —> Port B Port C —> Port B PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 1, 2 on Port B.
Configuring PFC in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure priority-based flow control (PFC) setting. To configure PFC parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface. PFC Configuration Notes PFC provides flow control based on the 802.1p priorities in a converged Ethernet traffic that is received on an interface and is enabled by default when you enable DCB.
• • You can enable PFC on a maximum of four priority queues on an interface. The default is two. Enabling PFC for dot1p priorities configures the corresponding port queue as lossless. You cannot enable PFC and link-level flow control at the same time on an interface. Applying a DCB Map on a Port When you apply a DCB map with PFC enabled on a switch interface, a memory buffer for PFC-enabled priority traffic is automatically allocated.
Configuring Lossless Queues DCB also supports the manual configuration of lossless queues on an interface when PFC mode is disabled in a DCB map, apply the map on the interface. The configuration of no-drop queues provides flexibility for ports on which PFC is not needed, but lossless traffic should egress from the interface. Configuring no-drop queues is applicable only on the interfaces which do not need PFC.
Table 17. Configuring Lossless Queues on a Port Interface (continued) Step Task Command Command Mode You cannot configure PFC no-drop queues on an interface on which a DCB map with PFC enabled has been applied, or which is already configured for PFC using the pfc priority command. Range: 0-3. Separate queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example: pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3 Default: No lossless queues are configured.
This default behavior is impacted if you modify the total buffer available for PFC or assign static buffer configurations to the individual PFC queues. Behavior of Tagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets. Priority (Packet Dot1p) 2 will be mapped to PG6 on PRIO2PG setting. All other Priorities for which PFC is not enabled are mapped to default PG – PG7.
Dot1p Priority : 0 Queue : 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 Default dot1p-queue mapping is, Dell#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 Queue : 2 0 1 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 4. Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a. Enable DCB globally. Dell(conf)#dcb enable b. Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled.
The range for priority group is from 0 to 7. Set the bandwidth in percentage. The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. Committed and peak bandwidth is in megabits per second. The range is from 0 to 40000. Committed and peak burst size is in kilobytes. Default is 50. The range is from 0 to 10000. 3. Configure the 802.1p priorities for the traffic on which you want to apply an ETS output policy. PRIORITY-GROUP mode priority-list value The range is from 0 to 7. The default is none.
NOTE: CIN supports only the dot1p priority-queue assignment in a priority group. To configure a dot1p priority flow in a priority group to operate with link strict priority, you configure: The dot1p priority for strict-priority scheduling (strict-priority command). The priority group for strict-priority scheduling (scheduler strict command.
• • • • • • ETS-assigned bandwidth allocation and strict-priority scheduling apply only to data queues, not to control queues. Dell Networking OS supports hierarchical scheduling on an interface. The control traffic on Dell Networking OS is redirected to control queues as higher priority traffic with strict priority scheduling. After the control queues drain out, the remaining data traffic is scheduled to queues according to the bandwidth and scheduler configuration in the DCB map.
• • Strict-priority groups: If priority group 3 has free bandwidth, it is distributed as follows: 20% of the free bandwidth to priority group 1 and 30% of the free bandwidth to priority group 2. If priority group 1 or 2 has free bandwidth, (20 + 30)% of the free bandwidth is distributed to priority group 3. Priority groups 1 and 2 retain whatever free bandwidth remains up to the (20+ 30)%.
DCBx Port Roles To enable the auto-configuration of DCBx-enabled ports and propagate DCB configurations learned from peer DCBx devices internally to other switch ports, use the following DCBx port roles. Auto-upstream The port advertises its own configuration to DCBx peers and is willing to receive peer configuration. The port also propagates its configuration to other ports on the switch. The first auto-upstream that is capable of receiving a peer configuration is elected as the configuration source.
NOTE: On a DCBx port, application priority TLV advertisements are handled as follows: • The application priority TLV is transmitted only if the priorities in the advertisement match the configured PFC priorities on the port. • On auto-upstream and auto-downstream ports: ○ If a configuration source is elected, the ports send an application priority TLV based on the application priority TLV received on the configuration-source port.
Propagation of DCB Information When an auto-upstream or auto-downstream port receives a DCB configuration from a peer, the port acts as a DCBx client and checks if a DCBx configuration source exists on the switch. • • If a configuration source is found, the received configuration is checked against the currently configured values that are internally propagated by the configuration source.
Figure 31. DCBx Sample Topology DCBx Prerequisites and Restrictions The following prerequisites and restrictions apply when you configure DCBx operation on a port: • • For DCBx, on a port interface, enable LLDP in both Send (TX) and Receive (RX) mode (the protocol lldp mode command; refer to the example in CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations in the Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) chapter). If multiple DCBx peer ports are detected on a local DCBx interface, LLDP is shut down.
• ieee-v2.5: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. 4. Configure the DCBx port role the interface uses to exchange DCB information. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] DCBx port-role {config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual} • • • • auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from auto-upstream ports.
• • • auto: configures all ports to operate using the DCBx version received from a peer. cee: configures a port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). cin configures a port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBx 1.0). ieee-v2.5: configures a port to use IEEE 802.1Qaz (Draft 2.5). The default is Auto. NOTE: To configure the DCBx port role the interfaces use to exchange DCB information, use the DCBx port-role command in INTERFACE Configuration mode (Step 3). 4.
DCBx Error Messages The following syslog messages appear when an error in DCBx operation occurs. LLDP_MULTIPLE_PEER_DETECTED: DCBx is operationally disabled after detecting more than one DCBx peer on the port interface. LLDP_PEER_AGE_OUT: DCBx is disabled as a result of LLDP timing out on a DCBx peer interface. DSM_DCBx_PEER_VERSION_CONFLICT: A local port expected to receive the IEEE, CIN, or CEE version in a DCBx TLV from a remote peer but received a different, conflicting DCBx version.
Table 19. Displaying DCB Configurations (continued) Command Output To clear PFC TLV counters, use the clear pfc counters interface port-type slot/port command. show interface port-type pfc statistics Displays counters for the PFC frames received and transmitted (by dot1p priority class) on an interface. show interface port-type ets {summary | detail} Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on an interface, including priority groups with priorities and bandwidth allocation.
Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is Recommended PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quantams Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/4 pfc detai
Table 20. show interface pfc summary Command Description (continued) Fields Description • Internally propagated: PFC configuration parameters were received from configuration source. PFC DCBx Oper status Operational status for exchange of PFC configuration on local port: match (up) or mismatch (down).
Admin mode is on Admin Parameters : -----------------Admin is enabled PG-grp Priority# BW-% BW-COMMITTED BW-PEAK TSA % Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 3 25 ETS 1 4 25 ETS 2 0,1,2,5,6,7 50 ETS 3 4 5 6 7 Remote Parameters : ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled PG-grp Priority# BW-% BW-COMMITTED BW-PEAK TSA % Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) ------------
7 Remote Parameters: ------------------Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled TC-grp Priority# 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12% ETS Bandwidth 100% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Pkts TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS
Table 21. show interface ets detail Command Description (continued) Field Description State Machine Type Type of state machine used for DCBx exchanges of ETS parameters: • • Feature: for legacy DCBx versions Asymmetric: for an IEEE version Conf TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. ETS TLV Statistic: Input Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs received. ETS TLV Statistic: Output Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs transmitted.
3 4 5 6 7 8 - - Dell(conf)# show stack-unit all stack-ports all ets details Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stack unit 2 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is en
The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (legacy CEE).
Table 22. show interface DCBx detail Command Description (continued) Field Description Local DCBx Status: DCBx Operational Version DCBx version advertised in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: DCBx Max Version Supported Highest DCBx version supported in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs. Local DCBx Status: Acknowledgment Number Acknowledgement number transmitted in Control TLVs.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Egress Queue Assignment 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Egress Queue Assignment 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method Priority-based flow control using dynamic buffer spaces is supported on the switch. To configure the dynamic buffer capability, perform the following steps: 1. Enable the DCB application.
priority 0 buffer-size 52 pause-threshold 16 resume-offset 10 shared-threshold-weight 7 6. Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)# dcb-policy buffer-threshold stack-unit all stack-ports all dcb-policy-name 7. Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces. This setting takes precedence over the default bufferthreshold setting. INTERFACE mode (conf-if-te) dcb-policy buffer-threshold buffer-threshold 8.
Figure 32. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic. 1. Enabling DCB Dell(conf)#dcb enable 2. Configure DCB map and enable PFC, and ETS Dell(conf)# service-class dynamic dot1p Or Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# service-class dynamic dot1p 3.
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
Option Number and Description Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
2. Servers unicast or broadcast a DHCPOFFER message in response to the DHCPDISCOVER that offers to the client values for the requested parameters. Multiple servers might respond to a single DHCPDISCOVER; the client might wait a period of time and then act on the most preferred offer. 3. The client broadcasts a DHCPREQUEST message in response to the offer, requesting the offered values. 4.
• • This platform supports 4000 DHCP Snooping entries. All platforms support Dynamic ARP Inspection on 16 VLANs per system. For more information, refer to Dynamic ARP Inspection. NOTE: If the DHCP server is on the top of rack (ToR) and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link, when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP (Bare Metal Provisioning) mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure.
show config After an IP address is leased to a client, only that client may release the address. Dell Networking OS performs a IP + MAC source address validation to ensure that no client can release another clients address. This validation is a default behavior and is separate from IP+MAC source address validation.
Using DNS for Address Resolution A domain is a group of networks. DHCP clients query DNS IP servers when they need to correlate host names to IP addresses. 1. Create a domain. DHCP domain-name name 2. Specify in order of preference the DNS servers that are available to a DHCP client.
EXEC Privilege mode debug ip dhcp server [events | packets] Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. • Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding • Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode.
Figure 35. Configuring a Relay Agent To view the ip helper-address configuration for an interface, use the show ip interface command from EXEC privilege mode. Example of the show ip interface Command R1_E600#show ip int tengigabitethernet 1/3 TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 is up, line protocol is down Internet address is 10.11.0.1/24 Broadcast address is 10.11.0.255 Address determined by user input IP MTU is 1500 bytes Helper address is 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.
• The switch can obtain a dynamically assigned IP address from a DHCP server. A start-up configuration is not received. Use bare metal provisioning (BMP) to receive configuration parameters (Dell Networking OS version and a configuration file). BMP is enabled as a factory-default setting on a switch. A switch cannot operate with BMP and as a DHCP client simultaneously. To disable BMP in EXEC mode, use the stop bmp command. After BMP stops, the switch acts as a DHCP client.
interface type slot/port[/subport] 2. Acquire the IP address for an Ethernet interface from a DHCP network server. INTERFACE mode ip address dhcp Dynamically assigned IP addresses can be released without removing the DHCP client operation on the interface on a switch configured as a DHCP client. 3. Manually acquire a new IP address from the DHCP server by releasing a dynamically acquired IP address while retaining the DHCP client configuration on the interface.
DHCP Client Operation with Other Features The DHCP client operates with other Dell Networking OS features, as the following describes. Stacking The DHCP client daemon runs only on the master unit and handles all DHCP packet transactions. It periodically synchronizes the lease file with the standby unit. When a stack failover occurs, the new master requires the same DHCP server-assigned IP address on DHCP client interfaces.
Configure Secure DHCP DHCP as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks. • • • • Option 82 DHCP Snooping Dynamic ARP Inspection Source Address Validation Option 82 RFC 3046 (the relay agent information option, or Option 82) is used for class-based IP address assignment.
Binding table entries are deleted when a lease expires or when the relay agent encounters a DHCPRELEASE. Line cards maintain a list of snooped VLANs. When the binding table is exhausted, DHCP packets are dropped on snooped VLANs, while these packets are forwarded across non-snooped VLANs. Because DHCP packets are dropped, no new IP address assignments are made. However, DHCPRELEASE and DHCPDECLINE packets are allowed so that the DHCP snooping table can decrease in size.
• Delete all of the entries in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode clear ip dhcp snooping binding Clearing the DHCP IPv6 Binding Table To clear the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Dell# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database Displaying the Contents of the Binding Table To display the contents of the binding table, use the following command.
33::22 333:22::22 11:22:11:22:11:23 11:22:11:22:11:24 120331 120331 S D Vl 200 Vl 300 Te 1/1 Te 1/2 Debugging the IPv6 DHCP To debug the IPv6 DHCP, use the following command. • Display debug information for IPV6 DHCP. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 dhcp IPv6 DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification Configure to enable verify source mac-address in the DHCP packet against the mac address stored in the snooping binding table. • Enable IPV6 DHCP snooping .
Broadcast An attacker can broadcast an ARP reply that specifies FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF as the gateway’s MAC address, resulting in all clients broadcasting all internet-bound packets. MAC flooding An attacker can send fraudulent ARP messages to the gateway until the ARP cache is exhausted, after which, traffic from the gateway is broadcast.
Bypassing the ARP Inspection You can configure a port to skip ARP inspection by defining the interface as trusted, which is useful in multi-switch environments. ARPs received on trusted ports bypass validation against the binding table. All ports are untrusted by default. To bypass the ARP inspection, use the following command. • Specify an interface as trusted so that ARPs are not validated against the binding table.
DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Dell Networking OS ensures that the packet’s source MAC address is checked against the CHADDR field in the DHCP header only for packets from snooped VLANs. • Enable DHCP MAC SAV.
The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters interface interface command displays the number of SAV dropped packets on a particular interface.
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. Topics: • • • • ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity Link Bundle Monitoring RTAG7 Flow-based Hashing for ECMP ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring.
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system. • Configure the maximum number of paths per ECMP group. CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network. The system can generate a maximum of 512 unique ecmp-groups. The ecmp-group indices are generated in even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6... 1022) and are for information only. You can configure ecmp-group with id 2 for link bundle monitoring. This ecmp-group is different from the ecmp-group index 2 that is created by configuring routes and is automatically generated.
mac Set the mac key fields to use in hash computation(default = sourcemac dest-mac vlan ethertype) tcp-udp Option to use TCP/UDP ports in packet for ECMP/LAG hashing tunnel Set the tunnel key fields to use in hash computation(default = Hash-computation based on Inner Header)] • • The second portion comes from static physical configuration such as ingress and egress port numbers.
Figure 36. Before Polarization Effect Router B performs the same hash as router A and all the traffic goes through the same path to router D, while no traffic is redirected to router E. Some of the anti-polarization techniques used generally to mitigate unequal traffic distribution in LAG/ECMP as follows: 1. Configuring different hash-seed values at each node - Hash seed is the primary parameter in hash computations that determine distribution of traffic among the ECMP paths.
xor8 of xor8 xor16 CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CR16 - 16 bit XOR] Example to view show hash-algorithm: Dell(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp flow-based-hashing crc16 Dell(conf)#end Dell#show hash-algorithm Hash-Algorithm linecard 0 Port-Set 0 Seed 185270328 Hg-Seed 185282673 EcmpFlowBasedHashingAlgo- crc16 EcmpAlgo- crc32MSB LagAlgo- crc32LSB HgAlgo- crc16 Figure 37.
15 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
The following table lists the FIP functions. Table 25. FIP Functions FIP Function Description FIP VLAN discovery FCoE devices (ENodes) discover the FCoE VLANs on which to transmit and receive FIP and FCoE traffic. FIP discovery FCoE end-devices and FCFs are automatically discovered. Initialization FCoE devices learn ENodes from the FLOGI and FDISC to allow immediate login and create a virtual link with an FCoE switch.
Port-based ACLs These ACLs are applied on all three port modes: on ports directly connected to an FCF, server-facing ENode ports, and bridge-to-bridge links. Port-based ACLs take precedence over global ACLs. FCoE-generated ACLs These take precedence over user-configured ACLs. A user-configured ACL entry cannot deny FCoE and FIP snooping frames. The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge in a converged Ethernet network.
• • To ensure that they are operationally active, check FIP snooping-enabled VLANs. Process FIP VLAN discovery requests and responses, advertisements, solicitations, FLOGI/FDISC requests and responses, FLOGO requests and responses, keep-alive packets, and clear virtual-link messages. FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack FIP snooping supports switch stacking as follows: • • • A switch stack configuration is synchronized with the standby stack unit.
• ○ The existing per-VLAN and FIP snooping configuration is stored. The configuration is re-applied the next time you enable the FIP snooping feature. You must apply the CAM-ACL space for the FCoE region before enabling the FIP-Snooping feature. If you do not apply CAM-ACL space, the following error message is displayed: Dell(conf)#feature fip-snooping % Error: Cannot enable fip snooping. CAM Region not allocated for Fcoe.
• A maximum of eight VLANS are supported for FIP snooping on the switch. When enabled globally, FIP snooping processes FIP packets in traffic only from the first eight incoming VLANs. When enabled on a per-VLAN basis, FIP snooping is supported on up to eight VLANs. Configure the FC-MAP Value You can configure the FC-MAP value to be applied globally by the switch on all or individual FCoE VLANs to authorize FCoE traffic.
• • The maximum number of FIP snooping sessions supported per ENode server is 32. To increase the maximum number of sessions to 64, use the fip-snooping max-sessions-per-enodemac command. The maximum number of FCFs supported per FIP snooping-enabled VLAN is twelve. Configuring FIP Snooping You can enable FIP snooping globally on all FCoE VLANs on a switch or on an individual FCoE VLAN. By default, FIP snooping is disabled.
Table 27. Displaying FIP Snooping Information (continued) Command Output show fip-snooping fcf [fcf-mac-address] Displays information on the FCFs in FIP-snooped sessions, including the FCF interface and MAC address, FCF interface, VLAN ID, FC-MAP value, FKA advertisement period, and number of ENodes connected.
The following example shows the show fip-snooping config command. Dell# show fip-snooping config FIP Snooping Feature enabled Status: Enabled FIP Snooping Global enabled Status: Enabled Global FC-MAP Value: 0X0EFC00 FIP Snooping enabled VLANs VLAN Enabled FC-MAP ---- -------------100 TRUE 0X0EFC00 The following example shows the show fip-snooping enode command.
Number of FLOGI Number of FDISC Number of FLOGO Number of Enode Keep Alive Number of VN Port Keep Alive Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FLOGO Rejects Number of CVL Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Dell(conf)# :2 :16 :0 :9021 :3349 :4437 :2 :2
Table 31. show fip-snooping statistics Command Descriptions Field Description Number of VLAN Requests Number of FIP-snooped VLAN request frames received on the interface. Number of VLAN Notifications Number of FIP-snooped VLAN notification frames received on the interface. Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snooped multicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface.
---*1 100 -----0X0EFC00 ---1 -----2 -------17 FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 40. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
16 FIPS Cryptography Federal information processing standard (FIPS) cryptography provides cryptographic algorithms conforming to various FIPS standards published by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), a non-regulatory agency of the US Department of Commerce. FIPS mode is also validated for numerous platforms to meet the FIPS-140-2 standard for a software-based cryptographic module. This chapter describes how to enable FIPS cryptography requirements on Dell Networking platforms.
• • • All open SSH and Telnet sessions, as well as all SCP and FTP file transfers, are closed. Any existing host keys (both RSA and RSA1) are deleted from system memory and NVRAM storage. FIPS mode is enabled. ○ If you enable the SSH server when you enter the fips mode enable command, it is re-enabled for version 2 only. ○ If you re-enable the SSH server, a new RSA host key-pair is generated automatically. You can also manually create this key-pair using the crypto key generate command.
• • The Telnet server re-enables (if it is present in the configuration). New 1024–bit RSA and RSA1 host key-pairs are created. To disable FIPS mode, use the following command. • To disable FIPS mode from a console port. CONFIGURATION mode no fips mode enable The following Warning message displays: WARNING: Disabling FIPS mode will close all SSH/Telnet connections, restart those servers, and destroy all configured host keys.
17 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring. If the ring is complete, the frame is received on its secondary port and the Master node resets its fail-period timer and continues normal operation.
Figure 41. Example of Multiple Rings Connected by Single Switch Important FRRP Points FRRP provides a convergence time that can generally range between 150ms and 1500ms for Layer 2 networks. The Master node originates a high-speed frame that circulates around the ring. This frame, appropriately, sets up or breaks down the ring. • • • • • • • • • • The Master node transmits ring status check frames at specified intervals. You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch.
Important FRRP Concepts The following table lists some important FRRP concepts. Concept Explanation Ring ID Each ring has a unique 8-bit ring ID through which the ring is identified (for example, FRRP 101 and FRRP 202, as shown in the illustration in Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch. Control VLAN Each ring has a unique Control VLAN through which tagged ring health frames (RHF) are sent. Control VLANs are used only for sending RHF, and cannot be used for any other purpose.
• Each ring has only one Master node; all others are transit nodes. FRRP Configuration These are the tasks to configure FRRP. • • Creating the FRRP Group Configuring the Control VLAN • ○ Configure Primary and Secondary ports Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs ○ Configure Primary and Secondary ports Other FRRP related commands are: • • • Clearing the FRRP Counters Viewing the FRRP Configuration Viewing the FRRP Information Creating the FRRP Group Create the FRRP group on each switch in the ring.
3. Assign the Primary and Secondary ports and the control VLAN for the ports on the ring. CONFIG-FRRP mode. interface primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan id Interface: • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. 4. Configure the Master node. CONFIG-FRRP mode. mode master 5.
5. Identify the Member VLANs for this FRRP group. CONFIG-FRRP mode. member-vlan vlan-id {range} VLAN-ID, Range: VLAN IDs for the ring’s Member VLANs. 6. Enable this FRRP group on this switch. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode.
Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • • • • • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only. Spanning Tree (if you enable it globally) must be disabled on both Primary and Secondary interfaces when you enable FRRP.
interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/14,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip addres
18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-byswitch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 42. Global GVRP Configuration Example Basic GVRP configuration is a two-step process: 1. Enabling GVRP Globally 2.
gvrp enable Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command. • Enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface.
Configure a GARP Timer Set GARP timers to the same values on all devices that are exchanging information using GVRP. There are three GARP timer settings. • • • Join — A GARP device reliably transmits Join messages to other devices by sending each Join message two times. To define the interval between the two sending operations of each Join message, use this parameter. The Dell Networking OS default is 200ms.
19 High Availability (HA) High availability (HA) is supported on Dell Networking OS. HA is a collection of features that preserves system continuity by maximizing uptime and minimizing packet loss during system disruptions. To support all the features within the HA collection, you should have the latest boot code. The following table lists the boot code requirements as of this Dell Networking OS release. Table 32. Boot Code Requirements Component Boot Code S4048–ON 1 2.0.
Peer Stack-unit: not present -- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration ------------------------------------------------Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 0 Auto Data Sync: Full Failover Type: Hot Failover Auto reboot Stack-unit: Enabled Auto failover limit: 3 times in 60 minutes -- Stack-unit Failover Record ------------------------------------------------Failover Count: 0 Last failover timestamp: None Last failover Reason: None Last failover type: None -- Last Data Block Sync Record: ------------------------------
redundancy auto-failover-limit • Re-Enable the auto-failover-limit with its default parameters. CONFIGURATION mode redundancy auto-failover-limit (no parameters) Disabling Auto-Reboot To disable auto-reboot, use the following command. • Prevent a failed stack unit from rebooting after a failover. CONFIGURATION mode redundancy disable-auto-reboot Manually Synchronizing Management and Standby Units To manually synchronize Management and Standby units at any time, use the following command.
• • Link aggregation control protocol. Spanning tree protocol. Refer to Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless. Graceful Restart Graceful restart (also known as non-stop forwarding) is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change.
• • Application core dump is the contents of the memory allocated to a failed application at the time of an exception. Kernel core dump is the central component of an operating system that manages system processors and memory allocation and makes these facilities available to applications. A kernel core dump is the contents of the memory in use by the kernel at the time of an exception. System Log Event messages provide system administrators diagnostics and auditing information.
20 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
Figure 43. IGMP Messages in IP Packets Join a Multicast Group There are two ways that a host may join a multicast group: it may respond to a general query from its querier or it may send an unsolicited report to its querier. Responding to an IGMP Query The following describes how a host can join a multicast group. 1. One router on a subnet is elected as the querier. The querier periodically multicasts (to all-multicast-systems address 224.0.0.1) a general query to all hosts on the subnet. 2.
• • To enable filtering, routers must keep track of more state information, that is, the list of sources that must be filtered. An additional query type, the Group-and-Source-Specific Query, keeps track of state changes, while the Group-Specific and General queries still refresh the existing state.
3. The host’s third message indicates that it is only interested in traffic from sources 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2. Because this request again prevents all other sources from reaching the subnet, the router sends another group-and-source query so that it can satisfy all other hosts. There are no other interested hosts so the request is recorded. Figure 46.
Figure 47. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1. Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2. Enable a multicast routing protocol.
• View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Dell#show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/10 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.5/24 IGMP is up on the interface IGMP query interval is 60 seconds IGMP querier timeout is 0 seconds IGMP max query response time is 10 seconds IGMP last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP immediate-leave is disabled IGMP activity: 2 joins IGMP querying router is 165.87.34.
Adjusting Timers The following sections describe viewing and adjusting timers. To view the current value of all IGMP timers, use the following command. • View the current value of all IGMP timers. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface For more information, refer to the example shown in Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces. Adjusting Query and Response Timers The querier periodically sends a general query to discover which multicast groups are active. A group must have at least one host to be active.
In the following example, virtual local area network (VLAN) 400 is configured with an access list to permit only IGMP reports for group 239.0.0.1. Though Receiver 2 sends a membership report for groups 239.0.0.1 and 239.0.0.2, a multicast routing table entry is created only for group 239.0.0.1. VLAN 300 has no access list limiting Receiver 1, so both IGMP reports are accepted and two corresponding entries are created in the routing table. Figure 48.
Table 33. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
show ip igmp interface View the enable status of this feature using the command from EXEC Privilege mode, as shown in the example in Selecting an IGMP Version. IGMP Snooping IGMP snooping enables switches to use information in IGMP packets to generate a forwarding table that associates ports with multicast groups so that when they receive multicast frames, they can forward them only to interested receivers.
INTERFACE VLAN mode ip igmp fast-leave • View the configuration. INTERFACE VLAN mode show config Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address ip igmp snooping fast-leave shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-100)# Disabling Multicast Flooding If the switch receives a multicast packet that has an IP address of a group it has not learned (unregistered frame), the switch floods that packet out of all ports on the VLAN.
Adjusting the Last Member Query Interval To adjust the last member query interval, use the following command. When the querier receives a Leave message from a receiver, it sends a group-specific query out of the ports specified in the forwarding table. If no response is received, it sends another. The amount of time that the querier waits to receive a response to the initial query before sending a second one is the last member query interval (LMQI).
Table 34.
• • • • • • • • • • • Applications can be configured or unconfigured as management applications using the application or no application command. All configured applications are considered as management applications and the rest of them as non-management applications. All the management routes (connected, static and default) are duplicated and added to the management EIS routing table. Any new management route added is installed to both the EIS routing table and default routing table.
• • • • • • • • If route lookup in EIS routing table succeeds, the application-specific packet count is incremented. This counter is viewed using the show management application pkt-cntr command. This counter is cleared using clear management application pkt-cntr command. If the route lookup in the EIS routing table fails or if management port is down, then packets are dropped.
Mapping of Management Applications and Traffic Type The following table summarizes the behavior of applications for various types of traffic when the management egress interface selection feature is enabled. Table 35. Mapping of Management Applications and Traffic Type Traffic type / Application type Switch initiated traffic Switch-destined traffic Transit Traffic EIS Management Application Management is the preferred egress port selected based on route lookup in EIS table.
EIS Behavior for ICMP: ICMP packets do not have TCP/UDP ports. To do an EIS route lookup for ICMP-based applications (ping and traceroute) using the source ip option, the management port IP address should be specified as the source IP address. If management port is down or route lookup fails, packets are dropped. Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected. Table 36.
Table 37.
21 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
• • • • • • • • • Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port Link Dampening Link Bundle Monitoring Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control Configure the MTU Size on an Interface Port-Pipes Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces View Advanced Interface Information Dynamic Counters Interface Types The following table describes different interface types. Table 38.
LineSpeed 10000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Master ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:09:54 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 3 packets, 192 bytes, 0 underruns 3 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 ove
INTERFACE mode show config Dell(conf-if-te-1/5)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport rate-interval 8 mac learning-limit 10 no-station-move no shutdown 2. Reset an interface to its factory default state. CONFIGURATION mode default interface interface-type] Dell(conf)#default interface tengigabitethernet 1/5 3. Verify the configuration.
Configuration Task List for Physical Interfaces By default, all interfaces are operationally disabled and traffic does not pass through them.
Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode. INTERFACE mode switchport To view the interfaces in Layer 2 mode, use the show interfaces switchport command in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Network) Mode When you assign an IP address to a physical interface, you place it in Layer 3 mode.
To view all interfaces to see with an IP address assigned, use the show ip interfaces brief command in EXEC mode as shown in View Basic Interface Information. To view IP information on an interface in Layer 3 mode, use the show ip interface command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell>show ip int vlan 58 Vlan 58 is up, line protocol is up Internet address is 1.1.49.1/24 Broadcast address is 1.1.49.
Management Interfaces The system supports the Management Ethernet interface as well as the standard interface on any port. You can use either method to connect to the system. Configuring Management Interfaces The dedicated Management interface provides management access to the system. You can configure this interface using the CLI, but the configuration options on this interface are limited.
Alternatively, you can use the virtual-ip command to manage a system with one or two RPMs. A virtual IP is an IP address assigned to the system (not to any management interfaces) and is a CONFIGURATION mode command. When a virtual IP address is assigned to the system, the active management interface of the RPM is recognized by the virtual IP address — not by the actual interface IP address assigned to it.
C 10.11.130.0/23 Dell# Direct, Te 1/1 0/0 1d2h VLAN Interfaces VLANs are logical interfaces and are, by default, in Layer 2 mode. Physical interfaces and port channels can be members of VLANs. For more information about VLANs and Layer 2, see Layer 2 and Virtual LANs (VLANs). NOTE: To monitor VLAN interfaces, use Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II (RFC 1213).
Many of the commands supported on physical interfaces are also supported on a Loopback interface. Null Interfaces The Null interface is another virtual interface. There is only one Null interface. It is always up, but no traffic is transmitted through this interface. To enter INTERFACE mode of the Null interface, use the following command. • Enter INTERFACE mode of the Null interface.
Each port channel must contain interfaces of the same interface type/speed. Port channels can contain a mix of 1G/10G/40G. The interface speed that the port channel uses is determined by the first port channel member that is physically up. Dell Networking OS disables the interfaces that do not match the interface speed that the first channel member sets.
Adding a Physical Interface to a Port Channel The physical interfaces in a port channel can be on any line card in the chassis, but must be the same physical type. NOTE: Port channels can contain a mix of Ethernet interfaces, but Dell Networking OS disables the interfaces that are not the same speed of the first channel member in the port channel (refer to 10/100/1000 Mbps Interfaces in Port Channels). You can add any physical interface to a port channel if the interface configuration is minimal.
69164 over 255-byte pkts, 143346 over 511-byte pkts, 942523 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 42 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 2456590833 packets output, 203958235255 bytes, 0 underruns Output 1640 Multicasts, 56612 Broadcasts, 2456532581 Unicasts 2456590654 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 5 minutes): Input 00.01Mbits/sec, 2 packets/sec Output 81.
Dell(conf-if-po-3)#sho conf ! interface Port-channel 3 no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/8 shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-3)# Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status to consider the port channel to be in “oper up” status. To set the “oper up” status of your links, use the following command. • Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status.
2. Use the switchport command in INTERFACE mode to enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if)#switchport 3. Verify the manually configured VLAN membership (show interfaces switchport interface command).
Dell Networking OS allows you to modify the hashing algorithms used for flows and for fragments. The load-balance and hash-algorithm commands are available for modifying the distribution algorithms. Changing the Hash Algorithm The load-balance command selects the hash criteria applied to port channels. If you do not obtain even distribution with the load-balance command, you can use the hash-algorithm command to select the hash scheme for LAG, ECMP and NH-ECMP.
Bulk Configuration Examples Use the interface range command for bulk configuration. • • • • • • • Create a Single-Range Create a Multiple-Range Exclude Duplicate Entries Exclude a Smaller Port Range Overlap Port Ranges Commas Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range.
Commas The following is an example of how to use commas to add different interface types to a range of interfaces. Example of Adding Interface Ranges Dell(config-if)# interface range tengigabitethernet 5/1 - 23, tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 2 Dell(config-if-range-te-5/1-23,te1/1-2)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-te-5/1-23,te1/1-2)# Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range.
Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces Monitor interface statistics with the monitor interface command. This command displays an ongoing list of the interface status (up/down), number of packets, traffic statistics, and so on. To view the interface’s statistics, use the following command. • View the interface’s statistics.
Maintenance Using TDR The time domain reflectometer (TDR) is supported on all Dell Networking switch/routers. TDR is an assistance tool to resolve link issues that helps detect obvious open or short conditions within any of the four copper pairs. TDR sends a signal onto the physical cable and examines the reflection of the signal that returns.
10G ports after the reload operation. While the reload is in progress, you might see error messages when the configuration file is being loaded. You can ignore these error messages. Similarly, such error messages are displayed during a reload after you configure the four individual 10G ports to be stacked as a single 40G port. To split a single 40G port into four 10G ports, use the following command. • Split a single 40G port into four 10G ports.
• When you remove the QSA module alone from a 40 Gigabit port, without connecting any SFP or SFP+ cables; Dell Networking OS does not generate any event. However, when you remove a QSA module that has SFP or SFP+ optical cables plugged in, Dell Networking OS generates an SFP or SFP+ Removed event. Example Scenarios Consider the following scenarios: • • • • QSFP port 0 is connected to a QSA with SFP+ optical cables plugged in. QSFP port 4 is connected to a QSA with SFP optical cables plugged in.
……………… ……………… SFP 1 Diagnostic Information =================================== SFP 1 Rx Power measurement type =================================== SFP 1 Temp High Alarm threshold SFP 1 Voltage High Alarm threshold SFP 1 Bias High Alarm threshold = OMA = 0.000C = 0.000V = 0.000mA Link Dampening Interface state changes occur when interfaces are administratively brought up or down or if an interface state changes.
To view a dampening summary for the entire system, use the show interfaces dampening summary command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell# show interfaces dampening summary 20 interfaces are configured with dampening. 3 interfaces are currently suppressed. Following interfaces are currently suppressed: Te 1/2 Te 3/1 Te 4/2 Dell# Clearing Dampening Counters To clear dampening counters and accumulated penalties, use the following command. • Clear dampening counters.
• Enable link bundle monitoring. • ecmp-group View all LAG link bundles being monitored. • show running-config ecmp-group Enable link bundle monitoring on port channel interfaces. link-bundle-monitor enable Dell(conf-if-po-10)#link-bundle-monitor enable • Configure threshold level for link bundle monitoring. link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold Dell(conf)#link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold • View the link bundle monitoring status.
To enable pause frames, use the following command. • Control how the system responds to and generates 802.3x pause frames on the Ethernet ports. INTERFACE mode flowcontrol rx [off | on] tx [off | on] [negotiate] ○ rx on: enter the keywords rx on to process the received flow control frames on this port. ○ rx off: enter the keywords rx off to ignore the received flow control frames on this port.
Port-Pipes A port pipe is a Dell Networking-specific term for the hardware packet-processing elements that handle network traffic to and from a set of front-end I/O ports. The physical, front-end I/O ports are referred to as a port-set. In the command-line interface, a port pipe is entered as port-set port-pipe-number. Auto-Negotiation on Ethernet Interfaces By default, auto-negotiation of speed and full duplex mode is enabled on 100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
NOTE: The show interfaces status command displays link status, but not administrative status. For both link and administrative status, use the show ip interface command.
Adjusting the Keepalive Timer To change the time interval between keepalive messages on the interfaces, use the keepalive command. The interface sends keepalive messages to itself to test network connectivity on the interface. To change the default time interval between keepalive messages, use the following command. • Change the default interval between keepalive messages. INTERFACE mode keepalive [seconds] • View the new setting.
Configuring the Interface Sampling Size Although you can enter any value between 30 and 299 seconds (the default), software polling is done once every 15 seconds. So, for example, if you enter “19”, you actually get a sample of the past 15 seconds. All LAG members inherit the rate interval configuration from the LAG. The following example shows how to configure rate interval when changing the default value.
Dynamic Counters By default, counting is enabled for IPFLOW, IPACL, L2ACL, L2FIB. For the remaining applications, Dell Networking OS automatically turns on counting when you enable the application, and is turned off when you disable the application. NOTE: If you enable more than four counter-dependent applications on a port pipe, there is an impact on line rate performance.
22 Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for protecting IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a communication session. Use IPSec between hosts, between gateways, or between hosts and gateways. IPSec is compatible with Telnet and FTP protocols. It supports two operational modes: Transport and Tunnel. • • Transport mode — (default) Use to encrypt only the payload of the packet. Routing information is unchanged.
match 0 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 23 match 1 tcp a::1 /128 23 a::2 /128 0 match 2 tcp a::1 /128 0 a::2 /128 21 match 3 tcp a::1 /128 21 a::2 /128 0 match 4 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 23 match 5 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 23 1.1.1.2 /32 0 match 6 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 0 1.1.1.2 /32 21 match 7 tcp 1.1.1.1 /32 21 1.1.1.2 /32 0 3. Apply the crypto policy to management traffic.
23 IPv4 Routing The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
IP Addresses Dell Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks. Supernetting, which increases the number of subnets, is also supported. To subnet, you add a mask to the IP address to separate the network and host portions of the IP address. At its most basic level, an IP address is 32-bits composed of network and host portions and represented in dotted decimal format.
• • ip-address mask: the IP address must be in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in slash prefix-length format (/24). secondary: add the keyword secondary if the IP address is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or use the show ip interface command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the second example.
S 11.1.1.0/24 Direct, Lo 0 --More-- Direct, Nu 0 0/0 00:02:30 Dell Networking OS installs a next hop that is on the directly connected subnet of current IP address on the interface. Dell Networking OS also installs a next hop that is not on the directly connected subnet but which recursively resolves to a next hop on the interface's configured subnet. • • • • When the interface goes down, Dell Networking OS withdraws the route. When the interface comes up, Dell Networking OS re-installs the route.
Using the Configured Source IP Address in ICMP Messages ICMP error or unreachable messages are now sent with the configured IP address of the source interface instead of the front-end port IP address as the source IP address. Enable the generation of ICMP unreachable messages through the ip unreachable command in Interface mode. When a ping or traceroute packet from an endpoint or a device arrives at the null 0 interface configured with a static route, it is discarded.
ip directed-broadcast To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. Resolution of Host Names Domain name service (DNS) maps host names to IP addresses. This feature simplifies commands such as Telnet and FTP by allowing you to enter a name instead of an IP address. Dynamic resolution of host names is disabled by default. Unless you enable the feature, the system resolves only host names entered into the host table with the ip host command.
To configure a domain name or a list of domain names, use the following commands. • Enter up to 63 characters to configure one domain name. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-name name • Enter up to 63 characters to configure names to complete unqualified host names. CONFIGURATION mode ip domain-list name Configure this command up to six times to specify a list of possible domain names.
For more information about Proxy ARP, refer to RFC 925, Multi-LAN Address Resolution, and RFC 1027, Using ARP to Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways. Configuration Tasks for ARP For a complete listing of all ARP-related commands, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
clear arp-cache [interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh] ○ ip ip-address (OPTIONAL): enter the keyword ip then the IP address of the ARP entry you wish to clear. ○ no-refresh (OPTIONAL): enter the keywords no-refresh to delete the ARP entry from CAM. Or to specify which dynamic ARP entries you want to delete, use this option with interface or ip ip-address. ○ ○ ○ ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information.
Figure 50. ARP Learning via ARP Request with ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP Enabled Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. On the device, the time between ARP resend is configurable. This timer is an exponential backoff timer.
Enabling ICMP Unreachable Messages By default, ICMP unreachable messages are disabled. When enabled, ICMP unreachable messages are created and sent out all interfaces. To disable and re-enable ICMP unreachable messages, use the following commands. • To disable ICMP unreachable messages. INTERFACE mode no ip unreachable • Set Dell Networking OS to create and send ICMP unreachable messages on the interface.
-------------------------------------------------te 1/1 1000 Configuring a Broadcast Address To configure a broadcast address, use the following command. • Configure a broadcast address on an interface. ip udp-broadcast-address Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.
2. If you enabled UDP helper, the system changes the destination IP address to the configured broadcast address 1.1.255.255 and forwards the packet to VLAN 100. 3. Packet 2 is also forwarded to the ingress interface with an unchanged destination address because it does not have broadcast address configured. Figure 51.
Figure 53. UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses The following describes UDP helper with no broadcast addresses configured. • • If the incoming packet has a broadcast destination IP address, the unaltered packet is routed to all Layer 3 interfaces. If the Incoming packet has a destination IP address that matches the subnet broadcast address of any interface, the unaltered packet is routed to the matching interfaces.
24 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
• Prefix Renumbering — Useful in transparent renumbering of hosts in the network when an organization changes its service provider. NOTE: As an alternative to stateless autoconfiguration, network hosts can obtain their IPv6 addresses using the dynamic host control protocol (DHCP) servers via stateful auto-configuration. NOTE: Dell Networking OS provides the flexibility to add prefixes on Router Advertisements (RA) to advertise responses to Router Solicitations (RS).
IPv6 Header Fields The 40 bytes of the IPv6 header are ordered, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 54. IPv6 Header Fields Version (4 bits) The Version field always contains the number 6, referring to the packet’s IP version. Traffic Class (8 bits) The Traffic Class field deals with any data that needs special handling. These bits define the packet priority and are defined by the packet Source. Sending and forwarding routers use this field to identify different IPv6 classes and priorities.
Value Description 41 IPv6 43 Routing header 44 Fragmentation header 50 Encrypted Security 51 Authentication header 59 No Next Header 60 Destinations option header NOTE: This table is not a comprehensive list of Next Header field values. For a complete and current listing, refer to the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) web page at . Hop Limit (8 bits) The Hop Limit field shows the number of hops remaining for packet processing.
This field identifies the length of the Hop-by-Hop Options header in 8-byte units, but does not include the first 8 bytes. Consequently, if the header is less than 8 bytes, the value is 0 (zero). • Options (size varies) This field can contain one or more options. The first byte if the field identifies the Option type, and directs the router how to handle the option. 00 Skip and continue processing. 01 Discard the packet.
In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet. Implementing IPv6 with Dell Networking OS Dell Networking OS supports both IPv4 and IPv6 and both may be used simultaneously in your system. The following table lists the Dell Networking OS version in which an IPv6 feature became available for each platform. The sections following the table give greater detail about the feature. Table 41.
Table 41. Dell Networking OS versions and supported platforms with IPv6 support (continued) Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location S4048–ON ISIS for IPv6 support for distribute lists and administrative distance 9.7.(0.1) OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 9.7.(0.1) Equal Cost Multipath for IPv6 9.7.(0.1) Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Path MTU Discovery Path MTU, in accordance with RFC 1981, defines the largest packet size that can traverse a transmission path without suffering fragmentation. Path MTU for IPv6 uses ICMPv6 Type-2 messages to discover the largest MTU along the path from source to destination and avoid the need to fragment the packet. The recommended MTU for IPv6 is 1280.
Figure 56. NDP Router Redirect IPv6 Neighbor Discovery of MTU Packets You can set the MTU advertised through the RA packets to incoming routers, without altering the actual MTU setting on the interface. The ipv6 nd mtu command sets the value advertised to routers. It does not set the actual MTU rate. For example, if you set ipv6 nd mtu to 1280, the interface still passes 1500-byte packets, if that is what is set with the mtu command.
The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
ND reachable time is 20120 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 ND dns-server address is 1000::1 with lifetime of 1 seconds ND dns-server address is 3000::1 with lifetime of 1 seconds ND dns-server address is 200
To have the changes take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings. • Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs. Enter the CAM profile name then the allocated amount. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl { ipv6acl } When not selecting the default option, enter all of the profiles listed and a range for each. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. • Show the current CAM settings.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. For a Null interface, enter the keyword null then the Null interface number.
rpf Dell# RPF table Displaying an IPv6 Interface Information To view the IPv6 configuration for a specific interface, use the following command. • Show the currently running configuration for the specified interface. EXEC mode show ipv6 interface interface {slot/port} Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For all brief summary of IPv6 status and configuration, enter the keyword brief.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ To display information about brief summary of all IPv6 routes, enter summary. To display information about Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routes, enter bgp. To display information about ISO IS-IS routes, enter isis. To display information about Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routes, enter ospf. To display information about Routing Information Protocol (RIP), enter rip. To display information about static IPv6 routes, enter static.
○ For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. Dell#show run int Te 2/2 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 no ip address ipv6 address 3:4:5:6::8/24 shutdown Dell# Clearing IPv6 Routes To clear routes from the IPv6 routing table, use the following command. • Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. EXEC mode clear ipv6 route {* | ipv6 address prefix-length} ○ *: all routes.
POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode match ra{ipv6-access-list name | ipv6-prefix-list name | mac-access-list name} 8. Enable verification of the advertised other configuration parameter. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode other-config-flag {on | off} 9. Enable verification of the advertised default router preference value. The preference value must be less than or equal to the specified limit. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode router-preference maximum {high | low | medium} 10. Set the router lifetime.
INTERFACE mode ipv6 nd ra-guard attach policy policy-name [vlan [vlan 1, vland 2, vlan 3.....]] 3. Display the configurations applied on all the RA guard policies or a specific RA guard policy. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 nd ra-guard policy policy-name The policy name string can be up to 140 characters.
25 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
Figure 57. iSCSI Optimization Example Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
NOTE: On a switch in which a large proportion of traffic is iSCSI, CoS queue assignments may interfere with other network control-plane traffic, such as ARP or LACP. Balance preferential treatment of iSCSI traffic against the needs of other critical data in the network. Information Monitored in iSCSI Traffic Flows iSCSI optimization examines the following data in packets and uses the data to track the session and create the classifier entries that enable QoS treatment.
The following syslog message is generated the first time an EqualLogic array is detected: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %LLDP-5-LLDP_EQL_DETECTED: EqualLogic Storage Array detected on interface Te 1/ 43 • • • At the first detection of an EqualLogic array, the maximum supported MTU is enabled on all ports and port-channels (if it has not already been enabled). Spanning-tree portfast is enabled on the interface LLDP identifies. Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface LLDP identifies.
If you enable iSCSI, flow control is automatically enabled on all interfaces. To disable flow control on all interfaces, use the no flow control rx on tx off command and save the configuration. To disable iSCSI optimization, which can turn on flow control again on reboot, use the no iscsi enable command and save the configuration. When you enable iSCSI on the switch, the following actions occur: • • • Link-level flow control is globally enabled, if it is not already enabled, and PFC is disabled.
Configuring iSCSI Optimization To configure iSCSI optimization, use the following commands. 1. For a non-DCB environment: Enable session monitoring. CONFIGURATION mode cam-acl l2acl 4 ipv4acl 4 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 2 l2qos 1 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 ecfmacl 0 fcoeacl 0 iscsioptacl 2 NOTE: Content addressable memory (CAM) allocation is optional.
[no] iscsi cos {enable | disable | dot1p vlan-priority-value [remark] | dscp dscp-value [remark]} • • • • • enable: enables the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI traffic so that iSCSI packets are scheduled in the switch with a dot1p priority 4 regardless of the VLAN priority tag in the packet. The default is: iSCSI packets are handled with dotp1 priority 4 without remark. disable: disables the application of preferential QoS treatment to iSCSI frames.
iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 The following example shows the show iscsi session command. VLT PEER1 Dell#show iscsi session Session 0: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.
26 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
Figure 58. ISO Address Format Multi-Topology IS-IS Multi-topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) allows you to create multiple IS-IS topologies on a single router with separate databases. Use this feature to place a virtual physical topology into logical routing domains, which can each support different routing and security policies. All routers on a LAN or point-to-point must have at least one common supported topology when operating in Multi-Topology IS-IS mode.
Graceful Restart Graceful restart is a protocol-based mechanism that preserves the forwarding table of the restarting router and its neighbors for a specified period to minimize the loss of packets. A graceful-restart router does not immediately assume that a neighbor is permanently down and so does not trigger a topology change. Normally, when an IS-IS router is restarted, temporary disruption of routing occurs due to events in both the restarting router and the neighbors of the restarting router.
• Accepts external IPv6 information and advertises this information in the PDUs. The following table lists the default IS-IS values. Table 43.
To configure IS-IS globally, use the following commands. 1. Create an IS-IS routing process. CONFIGURATION mode router isis [tag] tag: (optional) identifies the name of the IS-IS process. 2. Configure an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process. ROUTER ISIS mode net network-entity-title Specify the area address and system ID for an IS-IS routing process. The last byte must be 00. For more information about configuring a NET, refer to IS-IS Addressing. 3. Enter the interface configuration mode.
47.0004.004d.0001 Interfaces supported by IS-IS: Vlan 2 TenGigabitEthernet 4/22 Loopback 0 Redistributing: Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: level-1-2 Accept narrow metrics: level-1-2 Generate wide metrics: none Accept wide metrics: none Dell# To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
4. Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
To view all graceful restart-related configurations, use the show isis graceful-restart detail command in EXEC Privilege mode.
lsp-gen-interval [level-1 | level-2] seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 0 to 120. The default is 5 seconds. • The default level is Level 1. Set the LSP size. ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-mtu size ○ size: the range is from 128 to 9195. • The default is 1497. Set the LSP refresh interval. ROUTER ISIS mode lsp-refresh-interval seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535. • The default is 900 seconds. Set the maximum time LSPs lifetime.
Table 44. Metric Styles (continued) Metric Style Characteristics Cost Range Supported on IS-IS Interfaces narrow transition Sends narrow (old) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 63 wide transition Sends wide (new) TLVs and accepts both narrow (old) and wide (new) TLVs. 0 to 16777215 To change the IS-IS metric style of the IS-IS process, use the following command. • Set the metric style for the IS-IS process.
For more information about this command, refer to Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style. The following table describes the correct value range for the isis metric command. Metric Sytle Correct Value Range wide 0 to 16777215 narrow 0 to 63 wide transition 0 to 16777215 narrow transition 0 to 63 transition 0 to 63 To view the interface’s current metric, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or the show isis interface command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Dell# Controlling Routing Updates To control the source of IS-IS route information, use the following command. • Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving IS-IS routing information. ROUTER ISIS mode passive-interface interface ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information.
Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. • Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [metric value] [match external {1 | 2} | match internal] [metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] Configure the following parameters: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ process-id the range is from 1 to 65535. level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. metric value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. match external the range is from 1 or 2.
The Dell OS supports HMAC-MD5 authentication. • This password is inserted in Level 1 LSPs, Complete SNPs, and Partial SNPs. Set the authentication password for a routing domain. ROUTER ISIS mode domain-password [encryption-type | hmac-md5] password The Dell OS supports both DES and HMAC-MD5 authentication methods. This password is inserted in Level 2 LSPs, Complete SNPs, and Partial SNPs.
○ interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. • View information about IS-IS local update packets. EXEC Privilege mode debug isis local-updates [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: ○ interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. • View IS-IS SNP packets, include CSNPs and PSNPs.
Metric Style Correct Value Range for the isis metric Command wide transition 0 to 16777215 narrow transition 0 to 63 transition 0 to 63 Maximum Values in the Routing Table IS-IS metric styles support different cost ranges for the route. The cost range for the narrow metric style is 0 to 1023, while all other metric styles support a range of 0 to 0xFE000000. Change the IS-IS Metric Style in One Level Only By default, the IS-IS metric style is narrow.
Table 45. Metric Value When the Metric Style Changes (continued) Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console.
Table 47.
Figure 59. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology Dell(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.1/24 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ip router isis ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis metric-style wide level-1 metric-style wide level-2 net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
27 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
LACP Modes Dell Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • • • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG). CONFIGURATION mode switchport Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 32 Dell(conf-if-po-32)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-32)#switchport The LAG is in the default VLAN. To place the LAG into a non-default VLAN, use the tagged command on the LAG.
To configure LACP long timeout, use the following command. • Set the LACP timeout value to 30 seconds. CONFIG-INT-PO mode lacp long-timeout Dell(conf)# interface port-channel 32 Dell(conf-if-po-32)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-32)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-32)#lacp long-timeout Dell(conf-if-po-32)#end Dell# show lacp 32 Port-channel 32 admin up, oper up, mode lacp Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Figure 60. Shared LAG State Tracking To avoid packet loss, redirect traffic through the next lowest-cost link (R3 to R4). Dell Networking OS has the ability to bring LAG 2 down if LAG 1 fails, so that traffic can be redirected. This redirection is what is meant by shared LAG state tracking. To achieve this functionality, you must group LAG 1 and LAG 2 into a single entity, called a failover group. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking To configure shared LAG state tracking, you configure a failover group.
Figure 61. Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking The following are shared LAG state tracking console messages: • • 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 1 2d1h45m: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 To view the status of a failover group member, use the show interface port-channel command.
LACP Basic Configuration Example The screenshots in this section are based on the following example topology. Two routers are named ALPHA and BRAVO, and their hostname prompts reflect those names. Figure 62. LACP Basic Configuration Example Configure a LAG on ALPHA The following example creates a LAG on ALPHA.
0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics 136 packets, 16718 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 15 over 64-byte pkts, 121 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 136 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 Vlans, 0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Output 00.00 Mbits/sec,0 packets/sec, 0.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#end ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address ! port-ch
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
28 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Topics: • • • • • Manage the MAC Address Table MAC Learning Limit NIC Teaming Configure Redundant Pairs Far-End Failure Detection Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
Setting the MAC Learning Limit To set a MAC learning limit on an interface, use the following command. • Specify the number of MAC addresses that the system can learn off a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode mac learning-limit address_limit Three options are available with the mac learning-limit command: ○ dynamic ○ no-station-move ○ station-move NOTE: An SNMP trap is available for mac learning-limit station-move. No other SNMP traps are available for MAC Learning Limit, including limit violations.
To display a list of all interfaces with a MAC learning limit, use the following command. Display a list of all interfaces with a MAC learning limit. EXEC Privilege mode show mac learning-limit Dell Networking OS Behavior: The systems do not generate a station-move violation log entry for physical interfaces or port-channels when you configure mac learning-limit or when you configure mac learning-limit station-move-violation log.
Recovering from Learning Limit and Station Move Violations After a learning-limit or station-move violation shuts down an interface, you must manually reset it. To reset the learning limit, use the following commands. NOTE: Alternatively, you can reset the interface by shutting it down using the shutdown command and then re-enabling it using the no shutdown command. • Reset interfaces in the ERR_Disabled state caused by a learning limit violation or station move violation.
Figure 70. Configuring the mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp Command Configure Redundant Pairs Networks that employ switches that do not support the spanning tree protocol (STP) — for example, networks with digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAM) — cannot have redundant links between switches because they create switching loops (as shown in the following illustration).
Figure 71. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
As shown in the above illustration, interface 3/41 is a backup interface for 3/42, and 3/42 is in the Down state. If 3/41 fails, 3/42 transitions to the Up state, which makes the backup link active. A message similar to the following message appears whenever you configure a backup port.
and Te 1/2 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Far-End Failure Detection Far-end failure detection (FEFD) is a protocol that senses remote data link errors in a network. FEFD responds by sending a unidirectional report that triggers an echoed response after a specified time interval. You can enable FEFD globally or locally on an interface basis. Disabling the global FEFD configuration does not disable the interface configuration. Figure 72.
EXEC privilege mode (it can be done globally or one interface at a time) before the FEFD enabled system can become operational again. Table 48.
Te Te Te Te 1/1 1/2 1/3 1/4 Normal Normal Normal Normal (second) 3 3 3 3 Bi-directional Admin Shutdown Admin Shutdown Admin Shutdown Dell#show run fefd ! fefd-global mode normal fefd-global interval 3 Enabling FEFD on an Interface To enable, change, or disable FEFD on an interface, use the following commands. • Enable FEFD on a per interface basis. INTERFACE mode • fefd Change the FEFD mode. INTERFACE mode • fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] Disable FEFD protocol on one interface.
EXEC Privilege mode debug fefd packets Dell#debug fefd events Dell#config Dell(conf)#int te 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#shutdown 2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-ASTATE_DN: Changed interface Admin state to down: Te 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#2w1d22h : FEFD state on Te 1/1 changed from ANY to Unknown 2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 1/1 2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Te 4/1 2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interfac
29 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). Topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 802.
TLVs are encapsulated in a frame called an LLDP data unit (LLDPDU) (shown in the following table), which is transmitted from one LLDPenabled device to its LLDP-enabled neighbors. LLDP is a one-way protocol. LLDP-enabled devices (LLDP agents) can transmit and/or receive advertisements, but they cannot solicit and do not respond to advertisements. There are five types of TLVs. All types are mandatory in the construction of an LLDPDU except Optional TLVs.
IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 50. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Table 50. Optional TLV Types (continued) Type TLV Description 127 Maximum Frame Size Indicates the maximum frame size capability of the MAC and PHY.
Table 51. TIA-1057 (LLDP-MED) Organizationally Specific TLVs (continued) Type SubType TLV Description Inventory Management TLVs Implementation of this set of TLVs is optional in LLDP-MED devices. None or all TLVs must be supported. Dell Networking OS does not currently support these TLVs. 127 5 Inventory — Hardware Revision Indicates the hardware revision of the LLDP-MED device. 127 6 Inventory — Firmware Revision Indicates the firmware revision of the LLDP-MED device.
Table 52. Dell Networking OS LLDP-MED Capabilities (continued) Bit Position TLV Dell Networking OS Support 6–15 reserved No Table 53. LLDP-MED Device Types Value Device Type 0 Type Not Defined 1 Endpoint Class 1 2 Endpoint Class 2 3 Endpoint Class 3 4 Network Connectivity 5–255 Reserved LLDP-MED Network Policies TLV A network policy in the context of LLDP-MED is a device’s VLAN configuration and associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 configurations.
Table 54. Network Policy Applications (continued) Type Application Description 7 Streaming Video Specify this application type for dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances supporting real-time interactive video. 8 Video Signaling Specify this application type only if video control packets use a separate network policy than video data. 9–255 Reserved — Figure 77.
• Debugging LLDP Important Points to Remember • • • • • LLDP is enabled by default. Dell Networking systems support up to eight neighbors per interface. Dell Networking systems support a maximum of 8000 total neighbors per system. If the number of interfaces multiplied by eight exceeds the maximum, the system does not configure more than 8000. INTERFACE level configurations override all CONFIGURATION level configurations. LLDP is not hitless.
CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2. Enable LLDP. PROTOCOL LLDP mode no disable Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1. Enter Protocol LLDP mode.
CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2. Advertise one or more TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise {dcbx-appln-tlv | dcbx-tlv | dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. • • • • For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id vlan-name. For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description hello 10 no disable Dell(conf-lldp)# Dell(conf-lldp)#exit Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/31 Dell(conf-if-te-1/31)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/31)#protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/31-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/31-lldp)# Viewing Information Advertised by Adjacent LLDP Agents To view brief information abo
Remote MTU: 1554 Remote System Desc: Dell Networks Real Time Operating System Software Dell Operating System Version: 1.0. Dell Application Software Version: 9.4.0.0.
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode no mode R1(conf)#protocol lldp R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)#mode ? rx Rx only tx Tx only R1(conf-lldp)#mode tx R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities
! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Debugging LLDP You can view the TLVs that your system is sending and receiving. To view the TLVs, use the following commands. • View a readable version of the TLVs. debug lldp brief • View a readable version of the TLVs plus a hexadecimal version of the entire LLDPDU.
Table 55. LLDP Configuration MIB Objects MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description LLDP Configuration adminStatus lldpPortConfigAdminStatus Whether you enable the local LLDP agent for transmit, receive, or both. msgTxHold lldpMessageTxHoldMultiplier Multiplier value. msgTxInterval lldpMessageTxInterval Transmit Interval value. rxInfoTTL lldpRxInfoTTL Time to live for received TLVs. txInfoTTL lldpTxInfoTTL Time to live for transmitted TLVs.
Table 56.
Table 57. LLDP 802.1 Organizationally specific TLV MIB Objects (continued) TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Table 58.
Table 58.
30 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
• • • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN. When a large volume of traffic is processed, the clustering performance might be impacted in a small way. This limitation is applicable to switches that perform unicast flooding in the software. The ip vlan-flooding command applies globally across the system and for all VLANs.
This setting causes the multicast MAC address to be mapped to the cluster IP address for the NLB mode of operation of the switch. 2. Associate specific MAC or hardware addresses to VLANs.
31 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
Figure 82.
Implementation Information The Dell Networking OS implementation of MSDP is in accordance with RFC 3618 and Anycast RP is in accordance with RFC 3446. Configure Multicast Source Discovery Protocol Configuring MSDP is a four-step process. 1. Enable an exterior gateway protocol (EGP) with at least two routing domains. Refer to the following figures. The MSDP Sample Configurations show the OSPF-BGP configuration used in this chapter for MSDP.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1. Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2. Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
Enabling the Rejected Source-Active Cache To cache rejected sources, use the following command. Active sources can be rejected because the RPF check failed, the SA limit is reached, the peer RP is unreachable, or the SA message has a format error. • Cache rejected sources. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp cache-rejected-sa Accept Source-Active Messages that Fail the RFP Check A default peer is a peer from which active sources are accepted even though they fail the RFP check.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check. Dell(conf)#ip msdp peer 10.0.50.
3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Reason Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Rpf-Fail Limiting the Source-Active Messages from a Peer To limit the source-active messages from a peer, use the following commands. 1. OPTIONAL: Store sources that are received after the limit is reached in the rejected SA cache.
ip msdp cache-rejected-sa 2. Prevent the system from caching remote sources learned from a specific peer based on source and group. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp sa-filter list out peer list ext-acl As shown in the following example, R1 is advertising source 10.11.4.2. It is already in the SA cache of R3 when an ingress SA filter is applied to R3. The entry remains in the SA cache until it expires and is not stored in the rejected SA cache.
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R3(conf)# To display the configured SA filters for a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command from EXEC Privilege mode. Logging Changes in Peership States To log changes in peership states, use the following command. • Log peership state changes. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp log-adjacency-changes Terminating a Peership MSDP uses TCP as its transport protocol.
SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none R3(conf)#do clear ip msdp peer 192.168.0.1 R3(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:04 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Input (S,G) filter: myremotefilter Output (S,G) filter: none Debugging MSDP To debug MSDP, use the following command.
Figure 90. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1. In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2. Make this address the RP for the group. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim rp-address 3.
network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP. When multiple RPs exist within a domain, the RPs forward received active source information back to the originating RP, which violates the RFP rule. You can prevent this unnecessary flooding by creating a mesh-group. A mesh in this context is a topology in which each RP in a set of RPs has a peership with all other RPs in the set.
The following example shows an R2 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.
network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.22 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.22 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.22 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.22 no shutdown ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.11 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.22 ! ip route 192.168.0.1/32 10.11.0.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.21/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.23/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.2/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.4.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.2/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 100 ! router bgp 100 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.3 remote-as 200 neighbor 192.168.0.
! ip route 192.168.0.2/32 10.11.0.23 MSDP Sample Configuration: R4 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/22 ip address 10.10.42.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 4/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.43/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.0.4/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.5.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
32 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• • • • • Modifying the Interface Parameters Configuring an EdgePort Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change MSTP Sample Configurations Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking OS supports four variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 59. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .
Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally MSTP is not enabled by default. To enable MSTP globally, use the following commands. When you enable MSTP, all physical, VLAN, and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the MSTI 0. • • Within an MSTI, only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. 1. Enter PROTOCOL MSTP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree mstp 2. Enable MSTP.
To view which instance a VLAN is mapped to, use the show spanning-tree mst vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf-mstp)#name my-mstp-region Dell(conf-mstp)#exit Dell(conf)#do show spanning-tree mst config MST region name: my-mstp-region Revision: 0 MSTI VID 1 100 2 200-300 To view the forwarding/discarding state of the ports participating in an MSTI, use the show spanning-tree msti command from EXEC Privilege mode.
protocol spanning-tree mstp no disable MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 MSTI 2 bridge-priority 0 Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges Dell Networking OS supports only one MSTP region. A region is a combination of three unique qualities: • • • Name is a mnemonic string you assign to the region. The default region name is null. Revision is a 2-byte number. The default revision number OS is 0. VLAN-to-instance mapping is the placement of a VLAN in an MSTI.
PROTOCOL MSTP mode forward-delay seconds The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. 2. Change the hello-time parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode hello-time seconds NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3. Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. 4.
Table 60.
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ Use the shutdown command on the interface. Disable the shutdown-on-violation command on the interface (using the no spanning-tree stp-id portfast [bpduguard | [shutdown-on-violation]] command). Disable spanning tree on the interface (using the no spanning-tree command in INTERFACE mode). Disabling global spanning tree (using the no spanning-tree command in CONFIGURATION mode). To verify that EdgePort is enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode.
1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/11,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/11,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/11,31 no shutdown Router 3 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1. Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2. Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3. Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
spanning-tree spanning-tree spanning-tree spanning-tree spanning-tree spanning-tree configuration revision 123 MSTi instance 1 MSTi vlan 1 100 MSTi instance 2 MSTi vlan 2 200 MSTi vlan 2 300 (Step 2) interface 1/0/31 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit interface 1/0/32 no shutdown spanning-tree port mode enable switchport protected 0 exit (Step 3) interface vlan 100 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 ta
○ To verify the VLAN to MSTP instance mapping, use the show commands. ○ Are there “extra” MSTP instances in the Sending or Received logs? This may mean that an additional MSTP instance was configured on one router but not the others. The following example shows the show run spanning-tree mstp command. Dell#show run spanning-tree mstp ! protocol spanning-tree mstp name Tahiti revision 123 MSTI 1 VLAN 100 MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 The following example shows viewing the debug log of a successful MSTP configuration.
33 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Multicast Policies The Dell Networking OS supports multicast features for IPv4. IPv4 Multicast Policies The following sections describe IPv4 multicast policies.
INTERFACE mode ip igmp access-group access-list-name Dell Networking OS Behavior: Do not enter the ip igmp access-group command before creating the access-list. If you do, after entering your first deny rule, the Dell Networking OS clears the multicast routing table and re-learns all groups, even those not covered by the rules in the access-list, because there is an implicit deny all rule at the end of all access-lists.
Table 61. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description (continued) Location Description • • • ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.1/24 no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Preventing a Source from Registering with the RP To prevent the PIM source DR from sending register packets to route processor (RP) for the specified multicast source and group, use the following command.
Figure 94. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 62. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Table 62. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description (continued) Location Description 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.1/24 no shutdown 3/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
34 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 95. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
A tracked route matches a route in the routing table only if the exact address and prefix length match an entry in the routing table. For example, when configured as a tracked route, 10.0.0.0/24 does not match the routing table entry 10.0.0.0/8. If no route-table entry has the exact address and prefix length, the tracked route is considered to be DOWN.
VRRP Object Tracking As a client, VRRP can track up to 20 objects (including route entries, and Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces) in addition to the 12 tracked interfaces supported for each VRRP group. You can assign a unique priority-cost value from 1 to 254 to each tracked VRRP object or group interface. The priority cost is subtracted from the VRRP group priority if a tracked VRRP object is in a DOWN state.
Dell(conf-track-100)#end Dell#show track 100 Track 100 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 line-protocol Description: San Jose data center Tracking a Layer 3 Interface You can create an object that tracks the routing status of an IPv4 or IPv6 Layer 3 interface. You can track the routing status of any of the following Layer 3 interfaces: • • • • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information.
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7/2 ip routing Description: NYC metro The following is an example of configuring object tracking for an IPv6 interface: Dell(conf)#track 103 interface tengigabitethernet 1/11 ipv6 routing Dell(conf-track-103)#description Austin access point Dell(conf-track-103)#end Dell#show track 103 Track 103 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7/11 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1. Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535.
Tracking a Metric Threshold Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the metric threshold of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1. (Optional) Reconfigure the default resolution value used by the specified protocol to scale the metric for IPv4 or IPv6 routes. CONFIGURATION mode track resolution {ip route | ipv6 route} {isis resolution-value | ospf resolution-value} The range of resolution values is: • • ISIS routes - 1 to 1000.
The following example configures object tracking on the metric threshold of an IPv6 route: Dell(conf)#track 8 ipv6 route 2::/64 metric threshold Dell(conf-track-8)#threshold metric up 30 Dell(conf-track-8)#threshold metric down 40 Displaying Tracked Objects To display the currently configured objects used to track Layer 2 and Layer 3 interfaces, and IPv4 and IPv6 routes, use the following show commands.
ISIS OSPF 1 1 IPv6 Route Resolution ISIS 1 Example of the show track vrf Command Dell#show track vrf red Track 5 IP route 192.168.0.0/24 reachability, Vrf: red Reachability is Up (CONNECTED) 3 changes, last change 00:02:39 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 Example of Viewing Object Tracking Configuration Dell#show running-config track track 1 ip route 23.0.0.
35 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Figure 96. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.0 and is the core of any AS. All other areas must connect to Area 0. An OSPF backbone is responsible for distributing routing information between areas. It consists of all area border routers, networks not wholly contained in any area, and their attached routers. NOTE: If you configure two non-backbone areas, then you must enable the B bit in OSPF.
Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important. Routers that share a link become neighbors on that segment. OSPF uses the Hello protocol as a neighbor discovery and keep alive mechanism. After two routers are neighbors, they may proceed to exchange and synchronize their databases, which creates an adjacency.
Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone. The ABR keeps a copy of the link-state database for every area it connects to, so it may keep multiple copies of the link state database.
• • • • • (for example, the ASBR where the Type 5 advertisement originated. The link-state ID for Type 4 LSAs is the router ID of the described ASBR). Type 5: LSA — These LSAs contain information imported into OSPF from other routing processes. They are flooded to all areas, except stub areas. The link-state ID of the Type 5 LSA is the external network number.
Figure 98. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS supports up to 10,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Within the that 10,000 routes, you can designate up to 8,000 routes as external and up to 2,000 as inter/intra area routes. Dell Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF.
OSPF graceful restart understands that in a modern router, the control plane and data plane functionality are separate, restarting the control plane functionality (such as the failover of the active RPM to the backup in a redundant configuration), does not necessarily have to interrupt the forwarding of data packets.
Processing SNMP and Sending SNMP Traps Only the process in default vrf can process the SNMP requests and send SNMP traps. NOTE: SNMP gets request corresponding to the OspfNbrOption field in the OspfNbrTable returns a value of 66. OSPF ACK Packing The OSPF ACK packing feature bundles multiple LS acknowledgements in a single packet, significantly reducing the number of ACK packets transmitted when the number of LSAs increases.
NOTE: By default, OSPF is disabled. Configuration Task List for OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) You can perform the following tasks to configure Open Shortest Path First version 2 (OSPF for IPv4) on the switch. Two of the tasks are mandatory; others are optional.
2. Enable the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3. Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPFv2 process globally. CONFIGURATION mode router ospf process-id [vrf {vrf name}] • vrf name: enter the keyword VRF and the instance name to tie the OSPF instance to the VRF. All network commands under this OSPF instance are later tied to the VRF instance. The range is from 0 to 65535. The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process.
When configuring the network command, configure a network address and mask that is a superset of the IP subnet configured on the Layer-3 interface for OSPFv2 to use. You can assign the area in the following step by a number or with an IP interface address. • Enable OSPFv2 on an interface and assign a network address range to a specific OSPF area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M.
Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 13.1.1.1 (Designated Router) Dell> Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process. OSPF picks the highest interface address as the router-id and a Loopback interface address has a higher precedence than other interface addresses. Example of Viewing OSPF Status on a Loopback Interface Dell#show ip ospf 1 int TenGigabitEthernet 1/23 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 10.168.0.1/24, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 10.168.
3.3.3.3 Dell# 1 0 0 0 0 1 To view information on areas, use the show ip ospf process-id command in EXEC Privilege mode. Enabling Passive Interfaces A passive interface is one that does not send or receive routing information. Enabling passive interface suppresses routing updates on an interface. Although the passive interface does not send or receive routing updates, the network on that interface is still included in OSPF updates sent via other interfaces.
Setting the convergence parameter (from 1 to 4) indicates the actual convergence level. Each convergence setting adjusts the LSA parameters to zero, but the fast-convergence parameter setting allows for even finer tuning of the convergence speed. The higher the number, the faster the convergence. To enable or disable fast-convergence, use the following command. • Enable OSPF fast-convergence and specify the convergence level.
The dead interval must be four times the hello interval. • The dead interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the time interval between hello-packet transmission. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf hello-interval seconds ○ seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 10 seconds). • The hello interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Use the MD5 algorithm to produce a message digest or key, which is sent instead of the key.
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:06 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 Dell# Enabling OSPFv2 Authentication To enable or change various OSPF authentication parameters, use the following commands. • Set a clear text authentication scheme on the interface. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf authentication-key key Configure a key that is a text string no longer than eight characters.
CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode graceful-restart role [helper-only | restart-only] Dell Networking OS supports the following options: • • Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles. Selecting one or the other role restricts OSPFv2 to the single selected role.
Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process. NOTE: Do not route iBGP routes to OSPF unless there are route-maps associated with the OSPF redistribution. To redistribute routes, use the following command. • Specify which routes are redistributed into OSPF process.
• View the summary information for the OSPF database. EXEC Privilege mode show ip ospf database • View the configuration of OSPF neighbors connected to the local router. EXEC Privilege mode show ip ospf neighbor • View the LSAs currently in the queue. EXEC Privilege mode show ip ospf timers rate-limit • View debug messages.
Figure 99. Basic Topology and CLI Commands for OSPFv2 OSPF Area 0 — Te 1/1 and 1/2 router ospf 11111 network 10.0.11.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.12.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.1.11.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 ip address 10.2.12.2/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 10 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 3/1 and 3/2 router ospf 33333 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.13.
network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.20/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip address 10.2.21.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ip address 10.2.22.2/24 no shutdown Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) This section describes the configuration tasks for Open Shortest Path First version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) on the switch.
CONF-INT-type slot/port mode ipv6 address ipv6 address IPv6 addresses are normally written as eight groups of four hexadecimal digits; separate each group by a colon (:). The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2. Bring up the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode no shutdown Assigning Area ID on an Interface To assign the OSPFv3 process to an interface, use the following command. The ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on an interface and places the interface in the specified area.
• Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} ○ number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D. NOTE: Enter the router-id for an OSPFv3 router as an IPv4 IP address. • Disable OSPF. CONFIGURATION mode no ipv6 router ospf process-id} • Reset the OSPFv3 process. EXEC Privilege mode clear ipv6 ospf process Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command. • Configure the area as a stub area.
Configure the following required and optional parameters: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ bgp | connected | static: enter one of the keywords to redistribute those routes. metric metric-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295. metric-type metric-type: enter 1 for OSPFv3 external route type 1 OR 2 for OSPFv3 external route type 2. route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map. tag tag-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295.
○ Unplanned-only: the OSPFv3 router supports graceful-restart only for unplanned restarts. During an unplanned restart, OSPFv3 sends out a Grace LSA once the secondary RPM comes online. • The default is both planned and unplanned restarts trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart. Selecting one or the other mode restricts OSPFv3 to the single selected mode. Disable OSPFv3 graceful-restart.
Net LSA Count Inter Area Pfx LSA Count Inter Area Rtr LSA Count Group Mem LSA Count 3 12000 0 0 The following example shows the show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa command. Dell#show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa ! Type-11 Grace LSA (Area 0) LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.
• ○ You can only enable one security protocol (AH or ESP) at a time on an interface or for an area. Enable IPsec AH with the ipv6 ospf authentication command; enable IPsec ESP with the ipv6 ospf encryption command. ○ The security policy configured for an area is inherited by default on all interfaces in the area. ○ The security policy configured on an interface overrides any area-level configured security for the area to which the interface is assigned.
show crypto ipsec policy • Display the security associations set up for OSPFv3 interfaces in authentication policies. show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Configuring IPsec Encryption on an Interface To configure, remove, or display IPsec encryption on an interface, use the following commands.
area-id authentication ipsec spi number {MD5 | SHA1} [key-encryption-type] key ○ area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be authenticated. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. ○ spi number: is the SPI value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. ○ MD5 | SHA1: specifies the authentication type: message digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). ○ key-encryption-type: (optional) specifies if the key is encrypted.
Displaying OSPFv3 IPsec Security Policies To display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies, use the following commands. • Display the AH and ESP parameters configured in IPsec security policies, including the SPI number, key, and algorithms used. EXEC Privilege mode show crypto ipsec policy [name name] ○ name: displays configuration details about a specified policy.
Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d10 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-500 inbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound ah sas spi : 500 (0x1f4) transform : ah-md5-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy nam
Viewing Summary Information To get general route, configuration, links status, and debug information, use the following commands. • View the summary information of the IPv6 routes. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] summary • View the summary information for the OSPFv3 database. EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] database • View the configuration of OSPFv3 neighbors.
Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#end Dell# Enabling IPv6 Unicast Routing To enable IPv6 unicast routing, use the following command. • Enable IPv6 unicast routing globally. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 unicast routing Applying cost for OSPFv3 Change in bandwidth directly affects the cost of OSPF routes. • Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf interface-cost ○ interface-cost:The range is from 1 to 65535. Default cost is based on the bandwidth.
○ process-id: the process ID number assigned. ○ area-id: the area ID for this interface. Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID Globally To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 globally, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process globally and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} • The range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} ○ number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
Configuring Stub Areas To configure IPv6 stub areas, use the following command. • Configure the area as a stub area. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode area area-id stub [no-summary] ○ no-summary: use these keywords to prevent transmission in to the area of summary ASBR LSAs. ○ Area ID: a number or IP address assigned when creating the area. You can represent the area ID as a number from 0 to 65536 if you assign a dotted decimal format rather than an IP address.
CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode default-information originate [always [metric metric-value] [metric-type type-value]] [routemap map-name] Configure the following required and optional parameters: ○ ○ ○ ○ always: indicate that default route information is always advertised. metric metric-value: The range is from 0 to 4294967295. metric-type metric-type: enter 1 for OSPFv3 external route type 1 OR 2 for OSPFv3 external route type 2. route-map map-name: enter a name of a configured route map.
EXEC Privilege mode show run ospf • Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf database grace-lsa • Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf database database-summary The following example shows the show run ospf command. Dell#show run ospf ! router ospf 1 router-id 200.1.1.
Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : 36 Te 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers. IPsec is a set of protocols developed by the internet engineering task force (IETF) to support secure exchange of packets at the IP layer.
• In an OSPFv3 encryption policy: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Both encryption and authentication are used. IPsec security associations (SAs) are supported only in Transport mode (Tunnel mode is not supported). ESP with null encryption is supported for authenticating only OSPFv3 protocol headers. ESP with non-null encryption is supported for full confidentiality. 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL encryption algorithms are supported; encrypted and unencrypted keys are supported.
The SPI value must be unique to one IPsec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router. Configure the same authentication policy (the same SPI and key) on each OSPFv3 interface in a link. • Enable IPsec encryption for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6-based interface.
no area area-id authentication ipsec spi number • Display the configuration of IPSec authentication policies on the router. show crypto ipsec policy Configuring IPsec Encryption for an OSPFv3 Area To configure, remove, or display IPsec encryption in an OSPFv3 area, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec encryption in an OSPFv3 area, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)).
To display information on the SAs used on a specific interface, enter interface interface, where interface is one of the following values: ○ ○ ○ ○ For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
STATUS : ACTIVE inbound esp sas outbound esp sas Interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe40:4d11 IPSecv6 policy name: OSPFv3-1-600 inbound ah sas outbound ah sas inbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The
show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] neighbor • View debug messages for all OSPFv3 interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode debug ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] [event | packet] {type slot/port[/subport]} ○ ○ ○ ○ 562 For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port[/subport] information. For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number.
36 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Topics: • • • • Overview Implementing PBR Configuration Task List for Policy-based Routing Sample Configuration Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table.
• • • Source port Destination port TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • • • • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
The Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries. Because the order of rules is important, ensure that you configure any necessary sequence numbers. Never apply the permit statement because the redirect list covers all source and destination IP addresses. ip redirect-list rcl0 seq 5 redirect 2.2.2.2 ip any any seq 10 permit ip host 3.3.3.
The redirect rule supports Non-contiguous bitmasks for PBR in the Destination router IP address The following example shows how to create a rule for a redirect list by configuring: • • • • IP address of the next-hop router in the forwarding route IP protocol number Source address with mask information Destination address with mask information Example: Creating a Rule Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect ? A.B.C.D Forwarding router's address Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 3.3.3.
Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirectgroup IP redirect lists are supported on physical interfaces as well as virtual local area network (VLAN) and port-channel interfaces. NOTE: When you apply a redirect-list on a port-channel, when traffic is redirected to the next hop and the destination port-channel is shut down, the traffic is dropped. However, the traffic redirected to the destination port-channel is sometimes switched.
show cam pbr show cam-usage List the redirect list configuration using the show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name command. The non-contiguous mask displays in dotted format (x.x.x.x). The contiguous mask displays in /x format. Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
Sample Configuration You can use the following example configuration to set up a PBR. These are not comprehensive directions but are intended to give you a guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. Make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on. The Redirect-List GOLD defined in this example creates the following rules: • • • • description Route Gold traffic to the DS3 seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.
Assign Redirect-List GOLD to Interface 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER(conf)#int Te 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11)#ip add 192.168.3.2/24 EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11)#no shut EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11)# EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11)#ip redirect-group GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11)#no shut EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/11)#end EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#end EDGE_ROUTER# View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.
Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list redirect_list_with_track IP redirect-list redirect_list_with_track Defined as: seq 5 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 10 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 tcp any any, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 15 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Nexthop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 20 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp any host 144.
Dell(conf-redirect-list)#redirect tunnel 2 track 2 tcp any any Dell(conf-redirect-list)#end Dell# Apply the Redirect Rule to an Interface: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/28 Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#ip redirect-group explicit_tunnel Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit Dell(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.
37 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop.
which the message was received is added to the outgoing interface list associated with the (*,G) entry, and the message is not (and does not need to be) forwarded towards the RP. Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1.
• Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1. Enable multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing 2. Enable PIM-Sparse mode. INTERFACE mode ip pim sparse-mode To display which interfaces are enabled with PIM-SM, use the show ip pim interface command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip pim interface Address Interface Ver/ Mode 165.87.34.5 Te 1/10 v2/S 10.1.1.2 Vl 10 v2/S 20.1.1.5 Vl 20 v2/S 165.87.31.
Configuring S,G Expiry Timers By default, S, G entries expire in 210 seconds. You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries) or configure an expiry time for a particular entry. If you configure both, the ACL supersedes the global configuration for the specified entries. When you create, delete, or update an expiry time, the changes are applied when the keep alive timer refreshes.
Overriding Bootstrap Router Updates PIM-SM routers must know the address of the RP for each group for which they have (*,G) entry. This address is obtained automatically through the bootstrap router (BSR) mechanism or a static RP configuration. Use the following command if you have configured a static RP for a group. If you do not use the override option with the following command, the RPs advertised in the BSR updates take precedence over any statically configured RPs.
38 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1. Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2. Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created. CONFIGURATION mode ip pim ssm-range acl-name To display address ranges in the PIM-SSM range, use the show ip pim ssm-range command from EXEC Privilege mode. R1(conf)#do show run pim ! ip pim rp-address 10.11.12.2 group-address 224.0.0.
R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime Expires 239.0.0.2 Vlan 300 IGMPv2-Compat 00:00:07 Never Member Ports: Te 1/1 239.0.0.1 Vlan 400 INCLUDE 00:00:10 Never 10.11.4.2 R1(conf)#show ip igmp ssm-map Last Reporter 10.11.3.2 Interface Vlan 101 Group 226.0.0.0 Uptime 10:40:31 Expires Never Router mode IGMPv2 Last reporter 110.0.101.
Last reporter Last reporter mode Last report Group source Source address 10.11.5.2 00:00:01 10.11.3.2 IGMPv2 received Join list Uptime Expires Never Interface Vlan 400 Group 239.0.0.1 Uptime 00:00:05 Expires Never Router mode INCLUDE Last reporter 10.11.4.2 Last reporter mode INCLUDE Last report received ALLOW Group source list Source address Uptime Expires 10.11.5.
39 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
The maximum number of source ports that can be supported in a session is 128. The maximum number of destination ports that can be supported depends on the port mirroring directions as follows: • • • 4 per port pipe, if the four destination ports mirror in one direction, either rx or tx. 2 per port pipe, if the two destination ports mirror in bidirection. 3 per port pipe, if one of the destination port mirrors bidirection and the other two ports mirror in one direction (either rx or tx).
300 Te 1/17 Te 1/1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-300)# tx interface Port-based Given these parameters, the following illustration shows the possible port monitoring configurations. Figure 100. Port Monitoring Configurations Dell Networking OS Behavior: All monitored frames are tagged if the configured monitoring direction is egress (TX), regardless of whether the monitored port (MD) is a Layer 2 or Layer 3 port.
Dell(conf)#monitor session 0 Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#source po 10 dest ten 1/2 dir rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-0)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP ------ ------------------ ---- --------0 Te 1/1 Te 1/2 rx Port N/A 0 Po 10 Te 1/2 rx Port N/A Dest IP -------N/A N/A Dell(conf)#monitor session 1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#source vl 40 dest ten 1/3 dir rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#flow-based enable Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Dell(conf)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mo
2. Verify information about monitor configurations. EXEC mode EXEC Privilege mode show run monitor session Dell#show run monitor session ! monitor multicast-queue 7 Dell# Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
Remote Port Mirroring While local port monitoring allows you to monitor traffic from one or more source ports by directing it to a destination port on the same switch/router, remote port mirroring allows you to monitor Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and/or egress traffic on multiple source ports on different switches and forward the mirrored traffic to multiple destination ports on different switches.
Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
Restrictions When you configure remote port mirroring, the following restrictions apply: • • You can configure the same source port to be used in multiple source sessions. You cannot configure a source port channel or source VLAN in a source session if the port channel or VLAN has a member port that is configured as a destination port in a remote-port mirroring session.
Configuring the Sample Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches). Table 63. Configuration Steps for RPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode.
Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#mode remote-port-mirroring Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#tagged te 1/30 Dell(conf-if-vl-30)#exit Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#channel-member te 1/28-29 Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-10)#exit Dell(conf)#monitor session 3 type rpm Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#source port-channel 10 dest remote-vlan 30 dir both Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#no disable Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)# Dell(conf-mon-sess-3)#exit Dell(conf)#end Dell# Dell#show monitor session SessID Source Destinati
------ -----1 remote-vlan 10 2 remote-vlan 20 3 remote-vlan 30 Dell# ----------Te 1/4 Te 1/5 Te 1/6 --N/A N/A N/A ---N/A N/A N/A --------N/A N/A N/A -------N/A N/A N/A Configuring RSPAN Source Sessions to Avoid BPD Issues When ever you configure an RPM source session, you must ensure the following to avoid BPDU issues: 1. Enable control plane egress acl using the following command: mac control-plane egress-acl 2.
• The system allows to configure up to four ERPM sessions. • ERPM sessions do not copy locally sourced remote VLAN traffic from source trunk ports that carry RPM VLANs. ERPM sessions do not copy locally sourced ERPM GRE-encapsulated traffic from source ports. • Source VLAN monitoring is possible only for ingress packets and is not supported for egress direction. • A flow-based source VLAN is monitored only for ingress traffic (not egress traffic). direction.
The next example shows the configuration of an ERPM session in which VLAN 11 is monitored as the source interface and a MAC ACL filters the monitored ingress traffic.
○ Install any well-known Network Packet Analyzer tool which is open source and free to download. ○ Start capture of ERPM packets on the Sniffer and save it to the trace file (for example : erpmwithheader.pcap). ○ The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. In case of a packet with L3 VLAN, it would be 42 bytes long. The original payload /original mirrored data starts from the 39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off.
40 Private VLANs (PVLAN) The private VLAN (PVLAN) feature is supported on Dell Networking OS. For syntax details about the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Private VLANs commands chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same virtual local area network (VLAN).
PVLAN port types include: • • Community port — a port that belongs to a community VLAN and is allowed to communicate with other ports in the same community VLAN and with promiscuous ports. Host port — in the context of a private VLAN, is a port in a secondary VLAN: • • ○ The port must first be assigned that role in INTERFACE mode. ○ A port assigned the host role cannot be added to a regular VLAN.
NOTE: The outputs of the show arp and show vlan commands provide PVLAN data. For more information, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Configuration Task List The following sections contain the procedures that configure a private VLAN. • • • • Creating PVLAN Ports Creating a Primary VLAN Creating a Community VLAN Creating an Isolated VLAN Creating PVLAN ports PVLAN ports are ports that will be assigned to the PVLAN. 1.
Creating a Primary VLAN A primary VLAN is a port-based VLAN that is specifically enabled as a primary VLAN to contain the promiscuous ports and PVLAN trunk ports for the private VLAN. A primary VLAN also contains a mapping to secondary VLANs, which comprise community VLANs and isolated VLANs. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN to which you want to assign the PVLAN interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 3.
INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode community 4. Add one or more host ports to the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode tagged interface or untagged interface You can enter the interfaces singly or in range format, either comma-delimited (slot/port,port,port) or hyphenated (slot/ port-port). You can only add host (isolated) ports to the VLAN. Creating an Isolated VLAN An isolated VLAN is a secondary VLAN of a primary VLAN. An isolated VLAN port can only talk with the promiscuous ports in that primary VLAN. 1.
Private VLAN Configuration Example The following example shows a private VLAN topology. Figure 104. Sample Private VLAN Topology The following configuration is based on the example diagram for the Z9500: • • • • • Te 1/1 and Te 1/23 are configured as promiscuous ports, assigned to the primary VLAN, VLAN 4000. Te 1/25 is configured as a PVLAN trunk port, also assigned to the primary VLAN 4000. Te 1/24 and Te 1/47 are configured as host ports and assigned to the isolated VLAN, VLAN 4003.
• • The S4810 ports would have the same intra-switch communication characteristics as described for the Z9500. For transmission between switches, tagged packets originating from host PVLAN ports in one secondary VLAN and destined for host PVLAN ports in the other switch travel through the promiscuous ports in the local VLAN 4000 and then through the trunk ports (1/25 in each switch). Inspecting the Private VLAN Configuration The standard methods of inspecting configurations also apply in PVLANs.
NUM * 1 100 P 200 I 201 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports primary VLAN in PVLAN T Te 1/19-20 isolated VLAN in VLAN 200 T Te 1/21 The following example shows viewing a private VLAN configuration.
41 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Figure 105. Per-VLAN Spanning Tree The Dell Networking OS supports three other variations of spanning tree, as shown in the following table. Table 65. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .
4. Optionally, for load balancing, select a nondefault bridge-priority for a VLAN.
Figure 106. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 385 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/32) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.385 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.385 , designated path cost 0 Modifying Global PVST+ Parameters The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay and hello-time, and overwrites the values set on other PVST+ bridges.
Table 66.
The EdgePort status of each interface is given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Dell Networking OS Behavior: Regarding the bpduguard shutdown-on-violation command behavior: • • • • If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. When you add a physical port to a port channel already in an Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware.
extend system-id Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 5 brief VLAN 5 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32773, Address 0001.e832.73f7 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32773 (priority 32768 sys-id-ext 5), Address 0001.e832.
no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/12,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 200 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R3) interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/22 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/12,22 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/12,22 no shutdown ! inte
42 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 67.
Table 67. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Support for Port-Based, Policy-Based Features (continued) Feature Direction Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 108.
• • • • • • • Applying Layer 2 Match Criteria on a Layer 3 Interface Applying DSCP and VLAN Match Criteria on a Service Queue Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and Color-Marking Guidelines for Configuring ECN for Classifying and Color-Marking Packets Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with Multiple traffic class Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with single traffic class Enabling Buffer Statistics Tracking Implementation Information The Dell Networking QoS
Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#dot1p-priority 1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#end Honoring dot1p Priorities on Ingress Traffic By default, Dell Networking OS does not honor dot1p priorities on ingress traffic. You can configure this feature on physical interfaces and port-channels, but you cannot configure it on individual interfaces in a port channel. You can configure service-class dynamic dot1p from CONFIGURATION mode, which applies the configuration to all interfaces.
Rate shaping buffers, rather than drops, traffic exceeding the specified rate until the buffer is exhausted. If any stream exceeds the configured bandwidth on a continuous basis, it can consume all of the buffer space that is allocated to the port. • Apply rate shaping to outgoing traffic on a port. INTERFACE mode rate shape • Apply rate shaping to a queue.
Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL. You can also use VLAN IDs and VRF IDs to classify the traffic using layer 3 class-maps. You may specify more than one DSCP and IP precedence value, but only one value must match to trigger a positive match for the class map. NOTE: IPv6 and IP-any class maps cannot match on ACLs or VLANs. Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map.
Use Step 1 or Step 2 to start creating a Layer 2 class map. 1. Create a match-any class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-any 2. Create a match-all class map. CONFIGURATION mode class-map match-all 3. Specify your match criteria. CLASS MAP mode match mac After you create a class-map, Dell Networking OS places you in CLASS MAP mode. Match-any class maps allow up to five access-lists. Match-all class-maps allow only one. You can match against only one VLAN ID. 4. Link the class-map to a queue.
! class-map match-all ClassAF2 match ip access-group AF2 match ip dscp 18 Dell#show running-config ACL ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB1 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.2 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF1-FB2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.3 any seq 10 deny ip any any ! ip access-list extended AF2 seq 5 permit ip host 23.64.0.
Creating an Input QoS Policy To create an input QoS policy, use the following steps. 1. Create a Layer 3 input QoS policy. CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-input Create a Layer 2 input QoS policy by specifying the keyword layer2 after the qos-policy-input command. 2.
Table 69. Default Bandwidth Weights Queue Default Bandwidth Percentage for 4– Queue System Default Bandwidth Percentage for 8– Queue System 0 6.67% 1% 1 13.33% 2% 2 26.67% 3% 3 53.33% 4% 4 - 5% 5 - 10% 6 - 25% 7 - 50% NOTE: The system supports 8 data queues. When you assign a percentage to one queue, note that this change also affects the amount of bandwidth that is allocated to other queues.
POLICY-MAP-IN mode service-queue Applying an Input QoS Policy to an Input Policy Map To apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map, use the following command. • Apply an input QoS policy to an input policy map. POLICY-MAP-IN mode policy-service-queue qos-polcy Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Dell Networking OS provides the ability to honor DSCP values on ingress packets using Trust DSCP feature.
Table 72. Default dot1p to Queue Mapping dot1p Queue ID 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 1 4 2 5 3 6 3 7 3 The dot1p value is also honored for frames on the default VLAN. For more information, refer to Priority-Tagged Frames on the Default VLAN. • Enable the trust dot1p feature. POLICY-MAP-IN mode trust dot1p Mapping dot1p Values to Service Queues All traffic is by default mapped to the same queue, Queue 0.
Creating Output Policy Maps 1. Create an output policy map. CONFIGURATION mode policy-map-output 2. After you create an output policy map, do one or more of the following: Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface 3. Apply the policy map to an interface. Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue To apply an output QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Apply an output QoS policy to queues.
• • Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green. If you configured a DSCP color map on an interface that does not exist or you delete a DSCP color map that is configured on an interface, that interface uses an all green color policy. To create a DSCP color map: 1. Create the color-aware map QoS DSCP color map. CONFIGURATION mode qos dscp-color-map color-map-name 2.
Examples for Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Display summary information about a color policy for one or more interfaces. Dell# show qos dscp-color-policy summary Interface dscp-color-map TE 1/10 mapONE TE 1/11 mapTWO Display summary information about a color policy for a specific interface.
CONFIGURATION mode strict-priority The range is from 1 to 3. Weighted Random Early Detection Weighted random early detection (WRED) is a congestion avoidance mechanism that drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed. The WRED congestion avoidance mechanism drops packets to prevent buffering resources from being consumed. Traffic is a mixture of various kinds of packets. The rate at which some types of packets arrive might be greater than others.
Figure 110. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Table 73. Pre-Defined WRED Profiles Default Profile Name Minimum Threshold Maximum Threshold Maximum Drop Rate wred_drop 0 0 100 wred_teng_y 467 4671 100 wred_teng_g 467 4671 50 wred_fortyg_y 467 4671 50 wred_fortyg_g 467 4671 25 Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1. Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2.
QOS-POLICY-OUT mode wred Displaying Default and Configured WRED Profiles To display the default and configured WRED profiles, use the following command. • Display default and configured WRED profiles and their threshold values. EXEC mode show qos wred-profile Example of the show qos wred-profile Command.
The test cam-usage command allows you to verify that there are enough available CAM entries before applying a policy-map to an interface so that you avoid exceeding the QoS CAM space and partial configurations. This command measures the size of the specified policy-map and compares it to the available CAM space in a partition for a specified port-pipe.
The weight factor is set to zero by default, which causes the same behavior as dropping of packets by WRED during network loads or also called instantaneous ECN marking. In a topology in which congestion of the network varies over time, you can specify a weight to enable a smooth, seamless averaging of packets to handle the sudden overload of packets based on the previous time sampling performed. You can specify the weight parameter for front-end and backplane ports separately in the range of 0 through 15.
Configuring WRED and ECN Attributes The functionality to configure a weight factor for the WRED and ECN functionality for backplane ports is supported on the platform. WRED drops packets when the average queue length exceeds the configured threshold value to signify congestion. Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded.
But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”. Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with Multiple traffic class Consider the example where there are no different traffic classes that is all the packets are egressing on the default ‘queue0’. Dell Networking OS can be configured as below to mark the non-ecn packets as yellow packets.
Until Release 9.3(0.0), the software has the capability to qualify only on the 6-bit DSCP part of the ToS field in IPv4 Header. You can now accept and process incoming packets based on the 2-bit ECN part of the ToS field in addition to the DSCP categorization. The IPv4 ACLs (standard and Extended) are enhanced to add this qualifier. This new keyword ‘ecn’ is present for all L3 ACL types (TCP/UDP/IP/ICMP) at the level where the ‘DSCP’ qualifier is positioned in the current ACL commands.
seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_50 ! policy-map-input pmap_dscp_40_50 service-queue 2 class-map class_dscp_40 service-queue 3 class-ma
CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)# interface fo 1/4 INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if-fo-1/4)# ip address 90.1.1.1/16 2. Configure a Layer 2 QoS policy with Layer 2 (Dot1p or source MAC-based) match criteria. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)# policy-map-input l2p layer2 3. Apply the Layer 2 policy on a Layer 3 interface.
Classifying Incoming Packets Using ECN and Color-Marking Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN) is a capability that enhances WRED by marking the packets instead of causing WRED to drop them when the threshold value is exceeded. If you configure ECN for WRED, devices employ this functionality of ECN to mark the packets and reduce the rate of sending packets in a congested, heavily-loaded network.
• • • Classification based on DSCP only Classification based on ECN only Classification based on ECN and DSCP concurrently You can now use the set-color yellow keyword with the match ip access-group command to mark the color of the traffic as ‘yellow’ would be added in the ‘match ip’ sequence of the class-map configuration.
Sample configuration to mark non-ecn packets as “yellow” with Multiple traffic class Consider the example where there are no different traffic classes that is all the packets are egressing on the default ‘queue0’. Dell Networking OS can be configured as below to mark the non-ecn packets as yellow packets.
! ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-g
--------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 13 (interface Fo 1/156) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 17 (interface Fo 1/160) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 21 (interface Fo 1/164) -----------------------
MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST MCAST 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 643
43 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Table 75. RIP Defaults (continued) Feature Default • Transmit RIPv1 RIP timers • • • • update timer = 30 seconds invalid timer = 180 seconds holddown timer = 180 seconds flush timer = 240 seconds Auto summarization Enabled ECMP paths supported 16 Configuration Information By default, RIP is disabled in Dell Networking OS. To configure RIP, you must use commands in two modes: ROUTER RIP and INTERFACE.
To view the global RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Dell(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.0 Dell(conf-router_rip)# When the RIP process has learned the RIP routes, use the show ip rip database command in EXEC mode to view those routes. Dell#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.
• You can use this command multiple times to exchange RIP information with as many RIP networks as you want. Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving RIP routing information. ROUTER RIP mode passive-interface interface Assigning a Prefix List to RIP Routes Another method of controlling RIP (or any routing protocol) routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. A prefix list is applied to incoming or outgoing routes.
Setting the Send and Receive Version To change the RIP version globally or on an interface in Dell Networking OS, use the following command. To specify the RIP version, use the version command in ROUTER RIP mode. To set an interface to receive only one or the other version, use the ip rip send version or the ip rip receive version commands in INTERFACE mode. You can set one RIP version globally on the system using system.
Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 2 1 2 Routing for Networks: 10.0.0.0 Routing Information Sources: Gateway Distance Last Update Distance: (default is 120) Dell# Generating a Default Route Traffic is forwarded to the default route when the traffic’s network is not explicitly listed in the routing table. Default routes are not enabled in RIP unless specified.
○ weight: the range is from 1 to 255. The default is 120. ○ ip-address mask: the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), and the mask in slash format (/x). ○ access-list-name: the name of a configured IP ACL. • Apply an additional number to the incoming or outgoing route metrics.
RIP Configuration on Core2 The following example shows how to configure RIPv2 on a host named Core2. Core2(conf-if-te-2/3)# Core2(conf-if-te-2/3)#router rip Core2(conf-router_rip)#ver 2 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.200.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.300.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.10.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#network 10.11.20.0 Core2(conf-router_rip)#show config ! router rip network 10.0.0.
Core2# R 192.168.1.0/24 R 192.168.2.0/24 via 10.11.20.1, Te 2/3 via 10.11.20.1, Te 2/3 120/1 00:05:22 120/1 00:05:22 Core2# The following example shows the show ip protocols command to show the RIP configuration activity on Core 2.
[120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, TenGigabitEthernet 10.300.10.0/24 [120/1] via 10.11.20.2, 00:00:13, TenGigabitEthernet 10.11.20.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 10.11.30.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 10.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 192.168.1.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 192.168.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.168.2.0/24 directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 192.168.2.
RIP Configuration Summary The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 2. ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.20.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.200.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.250.10.1/24 no shutdown router rip version 2 10.200.10.0 10.300.10.0 10.11.10.0 10.11.20.
44 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
[no] rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value eventnumber falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] Configure the alarm using the following optional parameters: ○ number: alarm number, an integer from 1 to 65,535, the value must be unique in the RMON Alarm Table. ○ variable: the MIB object to monitor — the variable must be in SNMP OID format; for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.
Configuring RMON Collection Statistics To enable RMON MIB statistics collection on an interface, use the RMON collection statistics command in INTERFACE CONFIGURATION mode. • Enable RMON MIB statistics collection. CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (config-if) mode [no] rmon collection statistics {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] ○ controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. ○ integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON Statistics Table.
45 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP).
• • • Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change Important Points to Remember • • • • RSTP is disabled by default. Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology.
Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. To enable RSTP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the following commands. 1.
To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Te 3/4 R3# Altr 128.684 128 20000 BLK 20000 P2P No Adding and Removing Interfaces To add and remove interfaces, use the following commands. To add an interface to the Rapid Spanning Tree topology, configure it for Layer 2 and it is automatically added. If you previously disabled RSTP on the interface using the command no spanning-tree 0 command, re-enable it using the spanning-tree 0 command. • Remove an interface from the Rapid Spanning Tree topology.
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. • The default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode.
Influencing RSTP Root Selection RSTP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it is selected as the root bridge. To change the bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value ○ priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535.
no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-2/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed. To achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster, use RSTP fast hellos.
46 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
47 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ exec: sends accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. command level: sends accounting of commands executed at the specified privilege level. suppress: Do not generate accounting records for a specific type of user. default | name: enter the name of a list of accounting methods. start-stop: use for more accounting information, to send a start-accounting notice at the beginning of the requested event and a stop-accounting notice at the end.
• Step through all active sessions and print all the accounting records for the actively accounted functions.
• • • • • • enable: use the password you defined using the enable secret, enable password command in CONFIGURATION mode. In general, the enable secret command overrules the enable password command. line: use the password you defined using the password command in LINE mode. local: use the username/password database defined in the local configuration. none: no authentication. radius: use the RADIUS servers configured with the radius-server host command.
The following example shows enabling local authentication for console and remote authentication for the VTY lines. Dell(config)# aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell(config)# line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)# enable authentication mymethodlist Server-Side Configuration Using AAA authentication, the switch acts as a RADIUS or TACACS+ client to send authentication requests to a TACACS+ or RADIUS server.
• • • Privilege level 1 — is the default level for EXEC mode. At this level, you can interact with the router, for example, view some show commands and Telnet and ping to test connectivity, but you cannot configure the router. This level is often called the “user” level. One of the commands available in Privilege level 1 is the enable command, which you can use to enter a specific privilege level. Privilege level 0 — contains only the end, enable, and disable commands.
To configure a password for a specific privilege level, use the following command. • Configure a password for a privilege level. CONFIGURATION mode enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: ○ level level: Specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. ○ encryption-type: Enter 0 for clear text, 7 for DES-encrypted text, or 8 for sha256-based encrypted text. ○ password: Enter a string.
• • • level level: the range is from 0 to 15. Levels 0, 1, and 15 are pre-configured. Levels 2 to 14 are available for custom configuration. command: an Dell Networking OS CLI keyword (up to five keywords allowed). reset: return the command to its default privilege mode. To view the configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following example shows a configuration to allow a user john to view only EXEC mode commands and all snmp-server commands.
Specifying LINE Mode Password and Privilege You can specify a password authentication of all users on different terminal lines. The user’s privilege level is the same as the privilege level assigned to the terminal line, unless a more specific privilege level is assigned to the user. To specify a password for the terminal line, use the following commands. • Configure a custom privilege level for the terminal lines. LINE mode privilege level level ○ level level: The range is from 0 to 15.
RADIUS Authentication Dell Networking OS supports RADIUS for user authentication (text password) at login and can be specified as one of the login authentication methods in the aaa authentication login command. When configuring AAA authorization, you can configure to limit the attributes of services available to a user. When you enable authorization, the network access server uses configuration information from the user profile to issue the user's session.
Configuration Task List for RADIUS To authenticate users using RADIUS, you must specify at least one RADIUS server so that the system can communicate with and configure RADIUS as one of your authentication methods. The following list includes the configuration tasks for RADIUS.
• Enter the host name or IP address of the RADIUS server host. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server host {hostname | ip-address} [auth-port port-number] [retransmit retries] [timeout seconds] [key [encryption-type] key] Configure the optional communication parameters for the specific host: ○ ○ ○ ○ auth-port port-number: the range is from 0 to 65535. Enter a UDP port number. The default is 1812. retransmit retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3. timeout seconds: the range is from 0 to 1000.
Monitoring RADIUS To view information on RADIUS transactions, use the following command. • View RADIUS transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug radius TACACS+ Dell Networking OS supports terminal access controller access control system (TACACS+ client, including support for login authentication. Configuration Task List for TACACS+ The following list includes the configuration task for TACACS+ functions.
Second bold line: User authenticated using the secondary method.
Specifying a TACACS+ Server Host To specify a TACACS+ server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. • Enter the host name or IP address of the TACACS+ server host. CONFIGURATION mode tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} [port port-number] [timeout seconds] [key key] Configure the optional communication parameters for the specific host: ○ port port-number: the range is from 0 to 65535. Enter a TCP port number. The default is 49.
Enabling SCP and SSH Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol for secure remote login and other secure network services over an insecure network. Dell Networking OS is compatible with SSH versions 1.5 and 2, in both the client and server modes. SSH sessions are encrypted and use authentication. SSH is enabled by default. For details about the command syntax, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide.
4. On Switch 2, in response to prompts, enter the path to the desired file and enter the port number specified in Step 1. EXEC Privilege Mode 5. On the chassis, invoke SCP. CONFIGURATION mode copy scp: flash: The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server.
The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. Dell(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes. Dell(conf)#ip ssh rekey volume 4096 Configuring the SSH Server Key Exchange Algorithm To configure the key exchange algorithm for the SSH server, use the ip ssh server kex key-exchange-algorithm command in CONFIGURATION mode.
Configuring the SSH Server Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH server, use the ip ssh server cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode. cipher-list-: Enter a space-delimited list of ciphers the SSH server will support. The following ciphers are available. • • • • • • • 3des-cbc aes128-cbc aes192-cbc aes256-cbc aes128-ctr aes192-ctr aes256-ctr The default cipher list is aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc.
CONFIGURATION mode no ip ssh password-authentication enable 4. Enable RSA authentication in SSH. CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication enable 5. Install User’s public key for RSA authentication in SSH. CONFIGURATION Mode ip ssh rsa-authentication my-authorized-keys flash://public_key admin@Unix_client#ssh-keygen -t rsa Generating public/private rsa key pair. Enter file in which to save the key (/home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa): /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa already exists.
admin@Unix_client# cat shosts 10.16.127.201, ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEA8K7jLZRVfjgHJzUOmXxuIbZx/AyW hVgJDQh39k8v3e8eQvLnHBIsqIL8jVy1QHhUeb7GaDlJVEDAMz30myqQbJgXBBRTWgBpLWwL/ doyUXFufjiL9YmoVTkbKcFmxJEMkE3JyHanEi7hg34LChjk9hL1by8cYZP2kYS2lnSyQWk= The following example shows creating rhosts. admin@Unix_client# ls id_rsa id_rsa.pub rhosts shosts admin@Unix_client# cat rhosts 10.16.127.
VTY Line and Access-Class Configuration Various methods are available to restrict VTY access in Dell Networking OS. These depend on which authentication scheme you use — line, local, or remote. Table 78. VTY Access Authentication Method VTY access-class support? Username access-class support? Remote authorization support? Line YES NO NO Local NO YES NO TACACS+ YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 5.2.1.0 and later) RADIUS YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 6.1.1.
and you have configured an access class for the VTY line, Dell Networking OS immediately applies it. If the access-class is set to deny all or deny for the incoming subnet, Dell Networking OS closes the connection without displaying the login prompt. The following example shows how to deny incoming connections from subnet 10.0.0.0 without displaying a login prompt. The example uses TACACS+ as the authentication mechanism.
• • Displaying Information About Roles Logged into the Switch Display Role Permissions Assigned to a Command Overview of RBAC With Role-Based Access Control (RBAC), access and authorization is controlled based on a user’s role. Users are granted permissions based on their user roles, not on their individual user ID. User roles are created for job functions and through those roles they acquire the permissions to perform their associated job function. Each user can be assigned only a single role.
For consistency, the best practice is to define the same authorization method list across all lines, in the same order of comparison; for example VTY and console port. You could also use the default authorization method list to apply to all the LINES (console port, VTY). If you do not, the following error is displayed when you attempt to enable role-based only AAA authorization. % Error: Exec authorization must be applied to more than one line to be useful, e.g. console and vty lines.
Creating a New User Role Instead of using the system defined user roles, you can create a new user role that best matches your organization. When you create a new user role, you can first inherit permissions from one of the system defined roles. Otherwise you would have to create a user role’s command permissions from scratch. You then restrict commands or add commands to that role. For more information about this topic, see Modifying Command Permissions for Roles.
When you modify a command for a role, you specify the role, the mode, and whether you want to restrict access using the deleterole keyword or grant access using the addrole keyword followed by the command you are controlling access. For information about how to create new roles, see also Creating a New User Role. The following output displays the modes available for the role command.
The following example removes the secadmin access to LINE mode and then verifies that the security administrator can no longer access LINE mode, using the show role mode configure line command in EXEC Privilege mode.
This section contains the following AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles configuration tasks: • • • Configuring AAA Authentication for Roles Configuring AAA Authorization for Roles Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC Configure AAA Authentication for Roles Authentication services verify the user ID and password combination. Users with defined roles and users with privileges are authenticated with the same mechanism.
NOTE: Note that the methods were not applied to the console so the default methods (if configured) are applied there.
The following section shows you how to create an AV pair to allow a user to login from a network access server to have access to commands based on the user’s role. The format to create an AV pair for a user role is Force10-avpair= ”shell:role=“ where user-role is a user defined or system-defined role. In the following example, you create an AV pair for a system-defined role, sysadmin. Force10-avpair= "shell:role=sysadmin" In the following example, you create an AV pair for a user-defined role.
Task ID 2, EXEC Accounting record, 00:00:26 Elapsed, service=shell Display Information About User Roles This section describes how to display information about user roles.
Displaying Information About Users Logged into the Switch To display information on all users logged into the switch, using the show users command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays privilege level and/or user role. The mode is displayed at the start of the output and both the privilege and roles for all users is also displayed. If the role is not defined, the system displays "unassigned" .
48 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell Networking OS. Topics: • • • • • VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence Dynamic Mode CoS for VLAN Stacking Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling Provider Backbone Bridging VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.
Figure 113. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • • • • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
• • • Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports Debugging VLAN Stacking VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. • • Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
M Te 3/13 Dell# Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag The tag protocol identifier (TPID) field of the S-Tag is user-configurable. To set the S-Tag TPID, use the following command. • Select a value for the S-Tag TPID. CONFIGURATION mode vlan-stack protocol-type The default is 9100. To display the S-Tag TPID for a VLAN, use the show running-config command from EXEC privilege mode. Dell Networking OS displays the S-Tag TPID only if it is a non-default value.
NUM * 1 100 101 103 Status Inactive Inactive Inactive Inactive Description Q Ports U Te 1/1 T Te 1/1 M Te 1/1 Debugging VLAN Stacking To debug VLAN stacking, use the following command. • Debug the internal state and membership of a VLAN and its ports. debug member The port notations are as follows: • • • • • MT — stacked trunk MU — stacked access port T — 802.1Q trunk port U — 802.
Figure 114.
Figure 115.
Figure 116. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch The following table details the outcome of matched and mismatched TPIDs in a VLAN-stacking network with the S-Series. Table 79. Behaviors for Mismatched TPID Network Position Incoming Packet TPID Ingress Access Point untagged single-tag (0x8100) Core untagged System TPID Match Type Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
Table 79. Behaviors for Mismatched TPID (continued) Network Position Egress Access Point Incoming Packet TPID untagged System TPID Match Type 0xUVYZ double-tag first-byte switch to VLAN match switch to default VLAN 0xQRST double-tag mismatch switch to default VLAN switch to default VLAN 0xUVWX — switch to default VLAN switch to default VLAN double-tag match switch to VLAN switch to VLAN double-tag 0xUVWX 0xUVWX Pre-Version 8.2.1.0 Version 8.2.1.
Precedence Description Red Lowest-priority packets that are always dropped (regardless of congestion status). • Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to an Dell Networking OS drop precedence. INTERFACE mode dei honor {0 | 1} {green | red | yellow} You may enter the command once for 0 and once for 1. Packets with an unmapped DEI value are colored green. To display the DEI-honoring configuration, use the show interface dei-honor [interface slot/port[/subport]] in EXEC Privilege mode.
Figure 117. Statically and Dynamically Assigned dot1p for VLAN Stacking When configuring Dynamic Mode CoS, you have two options: • Mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the original C-Tag dot1p. In this case, you must have other dot1p QoS configurations; this option is classic dot1p marking. Mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the S-Tag dot1p.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlan-stack dot1p-mapping c-tag-dot1p 0-3 sp-tag-dot1p 7 service-policy input in layer2 no shutdown Mapping C-Tag to S-Tag dot1p Values To map C-Tag dot1p values to S-Tag dot1p values and mark the frames accordingly, use the following commands. 1. Allocate CAM space to enable queuing frames according to the C-Tag or the S-Tag.
Figure 118. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
Figure 119. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • • • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs. No protocol packets are tunneled when you enable VLAN stacking. L2PT requires the default CAM profile. Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1. Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-profile 2.
protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell Networking OS uses a Dell Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command. • Overwrite the BPDU with a user-specified destination MAC address when BPDUs are tunneled across the provider network.
The same is true for GARP VLAN registration protocol (GVRP). 802.1ad specifies that provider bridges participating in GVRP use a reserved destination MAC address called the Provider Bridge GVRP Address, 01-80-C2-00-00-0D, to exchange GARP PDUs instead of the GVRP Address, 01-80-C2-00-00-21, specified in 802.1Q. Only bridges in the service provider network use this destination MAC address so these bridges treat GARP PDUs originating from the customer network as normal data frames, rather than consuming them.
49 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
To avoid the back-off, either increase the global sampling rate or configure all the line card ports with the desired sampling rate even if some ports have no sFlow configured. Important Points to Remember • • • • • • • • • • The Dell Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via snmpset. By default, sFlow collection is supported only on data ports.
If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold). Dell#show sflow sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global extended information enabled: none 0 collectors configured 0 UDP packets exported 0 UDP packets dropped 0 sFlow samples collected 0 sFlow samples dropped due to sub-sampling Enabling and Disabling sFlow on an Interface By default, sFlow is disabled on all interfaces.
Configured sampling rate Actual sampling rate Counter polling interval Extended max header size :256 Samples rcvd from h/w :16384 :16384 :20 :0 Example of the show running-config sflow Command Dell#show running-config sflow ! sflow collector 100.1.1.12 agent-addr 100.1.1.
show sflow interface interface-name The following example shows the show sflow interface command. Dell#show sflow interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Te 1/1 sFlow type :Ingress Configured sampling rate :16384 Actual sampling rate :16384 Counter polling interval :20 Extended max header size :128 Samples rcvd from h/w :0 The following example shows the show running-config interface command.
CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode sflow polling-interval interval value ○ interval value: in seconds. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds. The default is 20 seconds. Back-Off Mechanism If the sampling rate for an interface is set to a very low value, the CPU can get overloaded with flow samples under high-traffic conditions. In such a scenario, a binary back-off mechanism gets triggered, which doubles the sampling-rate (halves the number of samples per second) for all interfaces.
If you did not enable any extended information, the show output displays the following (shown in bold).
50 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
Implementation Information The following describes SNMP implementation information. • • • • Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 as defined by RFC 1155, 1157, and 1212, SNMP version 2c as defined by RFC 1901, and SNMP version 3 as defined by RFC 2571. Dell Networking OS supports up to 16 trap receivers. Dell Networking OS implementation of the sFlow MIB supports sFlow configuration via SNMP sets.
Configuration Task List for SNMP Configuring SNMP version 1 or version 2 requires a single step. NOTE: The configurations in this chapter use a UNIX environment with net-snmp version 5.4. This environment is only one of many RFC-compliant SNMP utilities you can use to manage your Dell Networking system using SNMP. Also, these configurations use SNMP version 2c. • Creating a Community Configuring SNMP version 3 requires configuring SNMP users in one of three methods.
• Choose a name for the community. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server community name {ro | rw} To view your SNMP configuration, use the show running-config snmp command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell(conf)#snmp-server community my-snmp-community ro 22:31:23: %STKUNIT0-P:CP %SNMP-6-SNMP_WARM_START: Agent Initialized - SNMP WARM_START.
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded} Dell(conf)#snmp-server host 1.1.1.1 traps {oid tree} version 3 ? auth Use the SNMPv3 authNoPriv Security Level noauth Use the SNMPv3 noAuthNoPriv Security Level priv Use the SNMPv3 authPriv Security Level Dell(conf)#snmp-server host 1.1.1.
Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP You may configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system or from the management station using SNMP. To configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system and from the management station using SNMP, use the following commands. • (From a Dell Networking system) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number).
To identify the SNMPv1 community string, enter the name of the community-string. 2. Specify which traps the Dell Networking system sends to the trap receiver. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server enable traps Enable all Dell Networking enterprise-specific and RFC-defined traps using the snmp-server enable traps command from CONFIGURATION mode. Enable all of the RFC-defined traps using the snmp-server enable traps snmp command from CONFIGURATION mode. 3.
MINOR_PS_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: power supply redundant envmon temperature MINOR_TEMP: Minor alarm: chassis temperature MINOR_TEMP_CLR: Minor alarm cleared: chassis temperature normal (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC) MAJOR_TEMP: Major alarm: chassis temperature high (%s temperature reaches or exceeds threshold of %dC) MAJOR_TEMP_CLR: Major alarm cleared: chassis temperature lower (%s %d temperature is within threshold of %dC) envmon fan FAN_TRAY_BAD: Major alarm: fantray %d is missing or dow
Enabling an SNMP Agent to Notify Syslog Server Failure You can configure a network device to send an SNMP trap if an audit processing failure occurs due to loss of connectivity with the syslog server. If a connectivity failure occurs on a syslog server that is configured for reliable transmission, an SNMP trap is sent and a message is displayed on the console.
Copy Configuration Files Using SNMP To do the following, use SNMP from a remote client. • • • copy the running-config file to the startup-config file copy configuration files from the Dell Networking system to a server copy configuration files from a server to the Dell Networking system You can perform all of these tasks using IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. The examples in this section use IPv4 addresses; however, you can substitute IPv6 addresses for the IPv4 addresses in all of the examples.
Table 84. MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object OID Object Values Description copyDestFileName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.7 Path (if the file is not in the default directory) and filename. Specifies the name of destination file. copyServerAddress .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.8 IP Address of the server. The IP address of the server. • copyUserName .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.9 Username for the server. Username for the FTP, TFTP, or SCP server.
• • • you are using SNMP version 2c the community name is public the file f10-copy-config.mib is in the current directory or in the snmpset tool path Copying Configuration Files via SNMP To copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine, use the following command. • Copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileType.
• precede the values for copyUsername and copyUserPassword by the keyword s. > snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.110 i 2 copyDestFileName.110 s /home/startup-config copyDestFileLocation.110 i 4 copyServerAddress.110 a 11.11.11.11 copyUserName.110 s mylogin copyUserPassword.110 s mypass FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.110 = INTEGER: runningConfig(2) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileName.
Table 85. Additional MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP (continued) MIB Object OID Values Description copyTimeCompleted .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.13 Time value Specifies the point in the uptime clock that the copy operation completed. copyFailCause .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.14 1 = bad filename Specifies the reason the copy request failed. 2 = copy in progress 3 = disk full 4 = file exists 5 = file not found 6 = timeout 7 = unknown copyEntryRowStatus .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.
MIB Support to Display the Available Memory Size on Flash Dell Networking provides more MIB objects to display the available memory size on flash memory. The following table lists the MIB object that contains the available memory size on flash memory. Table 86. MIB Objects for Displaying the Available Memory Size on Flash via SNMP MIB Object OID Description chStackUnitFlashUsageUtil 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.9.1.6 Contains flash memory usage in percentage.
• To view the viewing the software core files generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v2c -c public 192.168.60.120 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.10 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.1 = 1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.2 = 2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.1.3 = 3 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.1.2.1 = 1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.2.1.1 = "/CORE_DUMP_DIR/flashmntr.core.gz" enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.2.1.2 = "/CORE_DUMP_DIR/FTP_STK_MEMBER/ f10cp_l2mgr_131108080758_Stk1.
Displaying the Ports in a VLAN Dell Networking OS identifies VLAN interfaces using an interface index number that is displayed in the output of the show interface vlan command. The following example shows viewing the VLAN interface index number using SNMP. Dell(conf)#do show interface vlan id 10 % Error: No such interface name.
Add Tagged and Untagged Ports to a VLAN The value dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts object is an array of all VLAN members. The dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts object is an array of only untagged VLAN members. All VLAN members that are not in dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts are tagged. • • To add a tagged port to a VLAN, write the port to the dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts object. To add an untagged port to a VLAN, write the port to the dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts and dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts objects.
F10-ISIS-MIB::f10IsisSysOloadWaitForBgp F10-ISIS-MIB::f10IsisSysOloadV6SetOverload F10-ISIS-MIB::f10IsisSysOloadV6SetOloadOnStartupUntil F10-ISIS-MIB::f10IsisSysOloadV6WaitForBgp To enable overload bit for IPv4 set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.1 and IPv6 set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.4 To set time to wait set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.2 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.5 respectively To set time to wait till bgp session are up set 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.3 and 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.18.1.
Each object comprises an OID concatenated with an instance number. In the case of these objects, the instance number is the decimal equivalent of the MAC address; derive the instance number by converting each hex pair to its decimal equivalent. For example, the decimal equivalent of E8 is 232, and so the instance number for MAC address 00:01:e8:06:95:ac is.0.1.232.6.149.172. The value of dot1dTpFdbPort is the port number of the port off which the system learns the MAC address.
NOTE: The interface index does not change if the interface reloads or fails over. If the unit is renumbered (for any reason) the interface index changes during a reload. To display the interface number, use the following command. • Display the interface index number. EXEC Privilege mode show interface To view the system image on Flash Partition A, use the chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers object or, to view the system image on Flash Partition B, use the chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers object. Table 89.
dot3aCurAggIndex SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.3.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 = INTEGER: 1 dot3aCurAggStatus SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.2.1.1.4.1.4.1.0.0.0.0.0.1.1 = INTEGER: 1 << Status active, 2 – status inactive Layer 3 LAG does not include this support. SNMP trap works for the Layer 2 / Layer 3 / default mode LAG. Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.
The following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is lost: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (19738) 0:03:17.38 SNMPv2MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1 = STRING: "NOT_REACHABLE: Syslog server 10.11.226.121 (port: 9140) is not reachable" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.6.1.1.2.
51 Stacking Using the Dell Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports or front end user ports. The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 1 to 6 and it supports stacking up to six units.
Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on two criteria. • • Unit priority — User-configurable. The range is from 1 to 14. A higher value (14) means a higher priority. The default is 0. By removing the stack-unit priority using the no stack-unit priority command, you can set the priority back to the default value of zero.
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 1 up up 10031 up 10031 2 2 up up 10031 up 10031 2 3 up up 10134 up 10031 Speed in RPM -- Unit 3 -Unit Type : Member Unit Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : S4048-ON - 54-port TE/FG (SK-ON) Current Type : S4048-ON - 54-port TE/FG (SK-ON) Master priority : 5 Hardware Rev : 2.
Use the following command to configure a virtual IP: Dell(conf)#virtual-ip {ip-address | ipv6–address | dhcp} Failover Roles If the stack master fails (for example, is powered off), it is removed from the stack topology. The standby unit detects the loss of peering communication and takes ownership of the stack management, switching from the standby role to the master role. The distributed forwarding tables are retained during the failover, as is the stack MAC address.
Stack#show system stack-unit 2 | grep priority Master priority : 0 Example of Adding a Standalone with a Lower MAC Address and Equal Priority to a Stack Stacking LAG When multiple links are used between stack units, Dell Networking OS automatically bundles them in a stacking LAG to provide aggregated throughput and redundancy.
-----------------------------------------------Mgmt ID: 0 Stack-unit ID: 5 Stack-unit Redundancy Role: Primary Stack-unit State: Active Stack-unit SW Version: 1-0(0-3387) Link to Peer: Up -- PEER Stack-unit Status ------------------------------------------------Stack-unit State: Standby Peer Stack-unit ID: 2 Stack-unit SW Version: 1-0(0-3387) -- Stack-unit Redundancy Configuration ------------------------------------------------Primary Stack-unit: mgmt-id 0 Auto Data Sync: Full Failover Type: Hot Failover A
terminal upload Dell(standby)# Set terminal line parameters Upload file -----------------CONSOLE ACCESS ON A MEMBER---------------------------Dell(stack-member-1)#? reset-self Reset this unit alone show Show running system information You can connect two units with two or more stacking cables in case of a stacking port or cable failure. Removal of only one of the cables does not trigger a reset.
Hardware Watchdog in Mixed-mode stacking The Hardware watchdog command is enabled by default in the S4048T-ON. In the S4048-ON switch, hardware watchdog is not supported. In a mixed-mode stacking scenario, you must enable Hardware Watchdog on the S4048T-ON switch.
Figure 121. 1. 3. 5. 7. 9. Stack-group 0 (Ports 1, 2, 3, and 4) Stack-group 2 (Ports 9, 10, 11, and 12) Stack-group 12 (Port 49) Stack-group 16 (Port 53) Stack-group 15 (Port 52) 2. 4. 6. 8. 10. Stack-group 1 (Ports 5, 6, 7, and 8) Stack-group 3 (Ports 13, 14, 15, and 16) Stack-group 14 (Port 51) Stack-group 17 (Port 54) Stack-group 13 (Port 50) You can connect the units while they are powered down or up. Stacking ports are bi-directional.
4. After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up in a stack after the reboot completes. To view the port assignments, use the show system stack-unit command. Creating a New Stack Prior to creating a stack, know which unit will be the management unit and which will be the standby unit. Enable the front ports of the units for stacking. For more information, refer to Enabling Front End Port Stacking. To create a new stack, use the following commands. 1. Power up all units in the stack.
In the above example, stack unit 1 is the master management unit, stack unit 2 is the standby unit. The cables are connected to each unit.
The following example shows how to configure two new switches for stacking using 10G ports. Dell-1(conf)#stack-unit 1 stack-group 0 Setting ports Te 1/1 Te 1/2 Te 1/3 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload. [confirm yes/no]:yes Dell-2(conf)#stack-unit 1 stack-group 0 Setting ports Te 1/1 Te 1/2 Te 1/3 as stack group will make their interface configs obsolete after a reload.
Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 Reload Type : normal-reload -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports ---------------------------------------------------------------1 Management online S4048-ON S4048-ON 9-10-0-0 72 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Standby online S4048-ON S4048-ON 9-10-0-0 72 5 Member not present 6 Member not present The following example shows adding a stack unit with a conflicting stack number (after).
Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack. The new unit synchronizes its running and startup configurations with the stack. 8. If a standalone switch already has stack groups configured. Attach cables to connect the ports already configured as stack groups on the switch to one or more switches in the stack. Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a number to the new unit and adds it as member switch in the stack.
EXEC Privilege mode stack-unit old-unit-number renumber new-unit-number Renumbering the stack manager triggers the whole stack to reload, as shown in the message below. When the stack comes back online, the master unit remains the management unit. Dell#stack-unit 2 renumber 1 Renumbering master unit will reload the stack.
Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up UNKNOWN up 10704 1 2 absent absent 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan1 Speed Fan2 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1 1 up up 10134 up 10031 1 2 up up 10031 up 10031 1 3 up up 10031 up 10031 Speed in RPM -- Unit 2 -Unit Type : Standby Unit Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : S4048-ON - 54-port TE/FG (SK-ON) C
3 3 2 3 up up up up 9929 10031 up up 10031 10134 Speed in RPM Dell# The following is an example of the show system brief command to view the stack summary information.
• • the management unit is powered down or a failover occurs. you disconnect the management unit from the stack. When the management unit fails, the unit disappears from the stack topology. At that time, the standby unit detects the communication loss and switches from the standby unit role to the management unit role in the stack. From the remaining units in the stack, the system selects a new standby unit based on the unit priority using the same algorithm used when the stack was initially created.
mixed-mode-stacking enable The following message appears prompting you to confirm the configuration: Enabling mixed-mode-stacking requires configuration save and reload to operate in compatible with S4048-ON. Do you want to reload? Proceed[confirm yes/no]: 2. Enter yes at this prompt and press the return key. The following message appears prompting you to save the configuration: System configuration has been modified. Save? [yes/no]: 3. Enter yes again and press the return key.
Country Code Piece Part ID PPID Revision Service Tag Expr Svc Code Auto Reboot Burned In MAC No Of MACs : : : : : : : : N/A N/A N/A N/A disabled 00:01:e8:8c:53:32 3 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus --------------------------------------------Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus --------------------------------------------1 0 absent absent 1 1 up AC up -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -------------------------------------------1 0 up up 7200 up 7200 1 1 up up 7200 up 744
The following example shows removing a stack member (before). Dell#show system brief Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 Reload Type : normal-reload -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports ----------------------------------------------------0 Management online S4810 S4810 8-3-7-13 64 1 Member online S4810 S4810 8-3-7-13 64 2 Member not present 3 Standby online S4810 S4810 8-3-7-13 64 The following example shows removing a stack member (after).
Recover from Stack Link Flaps Stack link integrity monitoring enables units to monitor their own stack ports and disable any stack port that flaps five times within 10 seconds. Dell Networking OS displays console messages for the local and remote members of a flapping link, and on the primary (master) and standby management units as KERN-2-INT messages if the flapping port belongs to either of these units. In the following example, a stack-port on the master flaps.
-- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -------------------------------------------0 0 up up 9360 up 9360 0 1 up up 9600 up 9360 1 0 up up 6720 up 6720 1 1 up up 6960 up 6720 Speed in RPM stack-1# 768 Stacking
52 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. Dell Networking OS Behavior: The minimum number of packets per second (PPS) that storm control can limit on the device is two.
INTERFACE mode storm-control multicast packets_per_second in • Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC packets more than the configured rate. INTERFACE mode storm-control pfc-llfc pps in shutdown NOTE: PFC/LLFC storm control enabled interface disables the interfaces if it receives continuous PFC/LLFC packets. It can be a result of a faulty NIC/Switch that sends spurious PFC/LLFC packets.
53 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell Networking OS.
• • • • • • Modifying Interface STP Parameters Enabling PortFast Prevent Network Disruptions with BPDU Guard STP Root Guard Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes Configuring Spanning Trees as Hitless Important Points to Remember • • • • • STP is disabled by default. The Dell Networking OS supports only one spanning tree instance (0). For multiple instances, enable the multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) or per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+).
To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1. If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode.
Figure 124. Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To enable STP globally, use the following commands. 1. Enter PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol spanning-tree 0 2. Enable STP. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode no disable To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Port 289 (TenGigabitEthernet 2/1) is Forwarding Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.289 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.2462 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e80d.2462 Designated port id is 8.
Table 92.
spanning-tree 0 priority priority-value The range is from 0 to 15. The default is 8. To view the current values for interface parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally. Enabling PortFast The PortFast feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner.
• • • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the Error Disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware). You can clear the Error Disabled state with any of the following methods: ○ Perform a shutdown command on the interface.
Te 1/6 128.263 128 Te 1/7 128.264 128 20000 FWD 20000 32768 0001.e805.fb07 128.653 20000 EDS 20000 32768 0001.e85d.0e90 128.264 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge ---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ---------------Te 1/6 Root 128.263 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No Te 1/7 ErrDis 128.
the port on Switch C transitions from a forwarding to a root-inconsistent state (shown by the green X icon). As a result, Switch A becomes the root bridge. Figure 126. STP Root Guard Prevents Bridging Loops Configuring Root Guard Enable STP root guard on a per-port or per-port-channel basis.
To disable STP root guard on a port or port-channel interface, use the no spanning-tree 0 rootguard command in an interface configuration mode. To verify the STP root guard configuration on a port or port-channel interface, use the show spanning-tree 0 guard [interface interface] command in a global configuration mode. Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps individually or collectively, use the following commands.
Figure 127. STP Loop Guard Prevents Forwarding Loops Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
• ○ If no BPDU is received from a remote device, loop guard places the port in a Loop-Inconsistent Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port. When used in a PVST+ network, STP loop guard is performed per-port or per-port channel at a VLAN level. If no BPDUs are received on a VLAN interface, the port or port-channel transitions to a Loop-Inconsistent (Blocking) state only for this VLAN. To enable a loop guard on an STP-enabled port or port-channel interface, use the following command.
54 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 128.
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
the collection, transmission and/or use of the Collected Data, you may not download, install or otherwise use SupportAssist. NOTE: This step is not mandatory and you can configure SupportAssist manually without performing this step. Even before you accept or reject the EULA, the configuration data is sent to the default centrally deployed SupportAssist Server. If you reject the EULA, the configuration data is not transmitted to the SupportAssist server. 2. Move to the SupportAssist Configuration mode.
1. Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity. Allows you to configure customized details for a specific activity. SUPPORTASSIST mode [no] activity {full-transfer} Dell(conf-supportassist)#activity full-transfer Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# 2. Copy an action-manifest file for an activity to the system. SUPPORTASSIST ACTIVITY mode action-manifest get tftp | ftp | flash Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest get tftp://10.
[no] enable Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#enable Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# Configuring SupportAssist Company SupportAssist Company mode allows you to configure name, address and territory information of the company. SupportAssist Company configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist company, use the following commands. 1. Configure the contact information for the company.
[no] email-address primary email-address [alternate email-address] Dell(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#email-address primary jdoe@mycompany.com Dell(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 3. Configure phone numbers of the contact person. SUPPORTASSIST PERSON mode [no] phone primary phone [alternate phone] Dell(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)#phone primary +919999999999 Dell(conf-supportassist-pers-john_doe)# 4. Configure the preferred method for contacting the person.
[no] url uniform-resource-locator Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#url https://192.168.1.1/index.htm Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# Viewing SupportAssist Configuration To view the SupportAssist configurations, use the following commands. 1. Display information on SupportAssist feature status including any activities, status of communication, last time communication sent, and so on.
for providing recommendations to improve your IT infrastructure. Dell SupportAssist also collects and stores machine diagnostic information, which may include but is not limited to configuration information, user supplied contact information, names of data volumes, IP addresses, access control lists, diagnostics & performance information, network configuration information, host/server configuration & performance information and related data (Collected Data) and transmits this information to Dell.
55 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Protocol Overview The NTP messages to one or more servers and processes the replies as received. The server interchanges addresses and ports, fills in or overwrites certain fields in the message, recalculates the checksum, and returns it immediately. Information included in the NTP message allows each client/server peer to determine the timekeeping characteristics of its other peers, including the expected accuracies of their clocks.
Figure 129. NTP Fields Implementation Information Dell Networking systems can only be an NTP client. Configure the Network Time Protocol Configuring NTP is a one-step process. • Enabling NTP Related Configuration Tasks • • • Configuring NTP Broadcasts Disabling NTP on an Interface Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes.
To display the calculated NTP synchronization variables received from the server that the system uses to synchronize its clock, use the show ntp associations command from EXEC Privilege mode. R6_E300(conf)#do show ntp associations remote ref clock st when poll reach delay offset disp ========================================================== #192.168.1.1 .LOCL. 1 16 16 76 0.98 -2.470 879.
Configuring NTP Authentication NTP authentication and the corresponding trusted key provide a reliable means of exchanging NTP packets with trusted time sources. NTP authentication begins when the first NTP packet is created following the configuration of keys. NTP authentication in Dell Networking OS uses the message digest 5 (MD5) algorithm and the key is embedded in the synchronization packet that is sent to an NTP time source.
org CD7F4F63.68000000 (14:51:15.406 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) rec CD7F4F63.6BE8F000 (14:51:15.421 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) xmt CD7F5368.D0535000 (15:8:24.813 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) 1w6d23h : NTP: rcv packet from 192.168.1.1 leap 0, mode 4, version 3, stratum 1, ppoll 1024 rtdel 0000 (0.000000), rtdsp AF587 (10959.090820), refid 4C4F434C (76.79.67.76) ref CD7E14FD.43F7CED9 (16:29:49.265 UTC Wed Apr 1 2009) org CD7F5368.D0535000 (15:8:24.813 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) rec CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.
To view the NTP configuration, use the show running-config ntp command in EXEC privilege mode. The following example shows an encrypted authentication key (in bold). All keys are encrypted. Dell#show running ntp ! ntp authenticate ntp authentication-key 345 md5 5A60910F3D211F02 ntp server 11.1.1.1 version 3 ntp trusted-key 345 Dell# Dell Networking OS Time and Date You can set the time and date using the Dell Networking OS CLI.
○ offset: enter one of the following: ▪ ▪ a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours in addition to UTC for the timezone. a minus sign (-) then a number from 1 to 23 as the number of hours.
clock summer-time time-zone recurring start-week start-day start-month start-time end-week end-day end-month end-time [offset] ○ time-zone: Enter the three-letter name for the time zone. This name displays in the show clock output. ○ start-week: (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following as the week that daylight saving begins and then enter values for startday through end-time: ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ▪ week-number: Enter a number from 1 to 4 as the number of the week in the month to start daylight saving time.
56 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.1/24 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ipv6 address 3::1/64 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#show config ! interface Tunnel 3 ip address 3.1.1.
Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ip unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#ipv6 unnumbered tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel mode ipip decapsulate-any Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#show config ! interface Tunnel 1 ip unnumbered TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ipv6 unnumbered TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 tunnel source 40.1.1.
57 Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if used with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link.
Figure 130. Uplink Failure Detection How Uplink Failure Detection Works UFD creates an association between upstream and downstream interfaces. The association of uplink and downlink interfaces is called an uplink-state group. An interface in an uplink-state group can be a physical interface or a port-channel (LAG) aggregation of physical interfaces. An enabled uplink-state group tracks the state of all assigned upstream interfaces.
Figure 131. Uplink Failure Detection Example If only one of the upstream interfaces in an uplink-state group goes down, a specified number of downstream ports associated with the upstream interface are put into a Link-Down state. You can configure this number and is calculated by the ratio of the upstream port bandwidth to the downstream port bandwidth in the same uplink-state group.
• • If you disable an uplink-state group, the downstream interfaces are not disabled regardless of the state of the upstream interfaces. ○ If an uplink-state group has no upstream interfaces assigned, you cannot disable downstream interfaces when an upstream link goes down. To enable the debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups, use the debug uplink-stategroup [group-id] command, where the group-id is from 1 to 16.
description text The maximum length is 80 alphanumeric characters. 6. (Optional) Disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group. UPLINK-STATE-GROUP mode no enable The default is upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. To re-enable upstream-link tracking, use the enable command. Clearing a UFD-Disabled Interface You can manually bring up a downstream interface in an uplink-state group that UFD disabled and is in a UFD-Disabled Error state.
02:38:53: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state to up: Fo 3/51 02:38:53: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_UP: Changed interface state to up: Fo 3/52 Displaying Uplink Failure Detection To display information on the UFD feature, use any of the following commands. • Display status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups. EXEC mode show uplink-state-group [group-id] [detail] ○ group-id: The values are from 1 to 16.
Uplink State Group : 7 Upstream Interfaces : Downstream Interfaces : Status: Enabled, Up Uplink State Group : 16 Status: Disabled, Up Upstream Interfaces : Te 1/4(Dwn) Po 8(Dwn) Downstream Interfaces : Te 1/10(Dwn) The following example shows viewing the interface status with UFD information.
Sample Configuration: Uplink Failure Detection The following example shows a sample configuration of UFD on a switch/router in which you configure as follows. • • • • • • Configure uplink-state group 3. Add downstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/1, 1/2, 1/5, 1/9, 1/11, and 1/12. Configure two downstream links to be disabled if an upstream link fails. Add upstream links Tengigabitethernet 1/3 and 1/4. Add a text description for the group. Verify the configuration with various show commands.
58 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • • • 812 On the web: http://www.
59 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
• Untagged interfaces must be part of a VLAN. To remove an untagged interface from the Default VLAN, create another VLAN and place the interface into that VLAN. Alternatively, use the no switchport command, and Dell Networking OS removes the interface from the Default VLAN. A tagged interface requires an additional step to remove it from Layer 2 mode. Because tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, remove the tagged interface from all VLANs using the no tagged interface command.
Information contained in the tag header allows the system to prioritize traffic and to forward information to ports associated with a specific VLAN ID. Tagged interfaces can belong to multiple VLANs, while untagged interfaces can belong only to one VLAN. Configuration Task List This section contains the following VLAN configuration tasks.
To tag frames leaving an interface in Layer 2 mode, assign that interface to a port-based VLAN to tag it with that VLAN ID. To tag interfaces, use the following commands. 1. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode of the VLAN to which you want to assign the interface. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 2. Enable an interface to include the IEEE 802.1Q tag header.
INTERFACE mode untagged interface This command is available only in VLAN interfaces. The no untagged interface command removes the untagged interface from a port-based VLAN and places the interface in the Default VLAN. You cannot use the no untagged interface command in the Default VLAN. The following example shows the steps and commands to move an untagged interface from the Default VLAN to another VLAN. To determine interface status, use the show vlan command.
○ secondary — This is the interface’s backup IP address. You can configure up to eight secondary IP addresses. Configuring Native VLANs Traditionally, ports can be either untagged for membership to one VLAN or tagged for membership to multiple VLANs. You must connect an untagged port to a VLAN-unaware station (one that does not understand VLAN tags), and you must connect a tagged port to a VLAN-aware station (one that generates and understands VLAN tags).
60 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 133. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • • • • • • • • • • • • • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
• • • • When a Virtual Machine (VM) moves from one VLT domain to the another VLT domain, the VM host sends the gratuitous ARP (GARP) , which in-turn triggers a mac movement from the previous VLT domain to the newer VLT domain. After a station move, if the host sends a TTL1 packet destined to its gateway; for example, a previous VLT node, the packet can be dropped.
• • Any proxy gateway configuration or LLDP configuration is not working. LLDP packets fail to reach the remote VLT domain devices (for example, because the system is down, rebooting, or the port physical link connection is down). Figure 134. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The above figure shows a sample VLT Proxy gateway scenario. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2.
Sample Configuration LLDP Method Dell(conf-vlt-domain)#proxy-gateway ll Dell(conf-vlt-domain-pxy-gw-lldp)#peer-domain-link port-channel 1 exclude-vlan 10 Sample Configuration Static Method Dell(conf-vlt-domain)#proxy-gateway static Dell(conf-vlt-domain-pxy-gw-static)#remote-mac-address exclude-vlan 10 • • Packet duplication may happen with “Exclude-VLAN” configuration – Assume you used the exclude-vlan option (called VLAN 10) in C and D and in C1 and D1; If packets for VLAN 10 with C’s
61 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR).
The following example shows how VLT is deployed. The switches appear as a single virtual switch from the point of view of the switch or server supporting link aggregation control protocol (LACP). Figure 135. Example of VLT Deployment VLT on Core Switches Uplinks from servers to the access layer and from access layer to the aggregation layer are bundled in LAG groups with end-to-end Layer 2 multipathing.
Figure 136. Enhanced VLT VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • • • • • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the vitality of VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces.
• • • • • • • • • • • Ensure that the spanning tree root bridge is at the Aggregation layer. Refer to RSTP and VLT for guidelines to avoid traffic loss, if you enable RSTP on the VLT device. If you reboot both VLT peers in BMP mode and the VLT LAGs are static, the DHCP server reply to the DHCP discover offer may not be forwarded by the ToR to the correct node. To avoid this scenario, configure the VLT LAGs to the ToR and the ToR port channel to the VLT peers with LACP.
• ○ A VLT domain consists of the two core chassis, the interconnect trunk, backup link, and the LAG members connected to attached devices. ○ Each VLT domain has a unique MAC address that you create or VLT creates automatically. ○ ARP tables are synchronized between the VLT peer nodes. ○ VLT peer switches operate as separate chassis with independent control and data planes for devices attached on non-VLT ports.
• ○ In the backup link between peer switches, heartbeat messages are exchanged between the two chassis for health checks. The default time interval between heartbeat messages over the backup link is 1 second. You can configure this interval. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. DSCP marking on heartbeat messages is CS6.
• ○ In a VLT domain, VRRP interoperates with virtual link trunks that carry traffic to and from access devices (see Overview). The VLT peers belong to the same VRRP group and are assigned master and backup roles. Each peer actively forwards L3 traffic, reducing the traffic flow over the VLT interconnect. ○ VRRP elects the router with the highest priority as the master in the VRRP group.
• • Ensure that the primary VLT node is the root bridge and the secondary VLT peer node has the second-best bridge ID in the network. If the primary VLT peer node fails, the secondary VLT peer node becomes the root bridge, avoiding problems with spanning tree port state changes that occur when a VLT node fails or recovers.
To change the duration of the configurable timer, use the delay-restore command. If you enable IGMP snooping, IGMP queries are also sent out on the VLT ports at this time allowing any receivers to respond to the queries and update the multicast table on the new node. This delay in bringing up the VLT ports also applies when the VLTi link recovers from a failure that caused the VLT ports on the secondary VLT peer node to be disabled.
not apply to server-side L2 VLT ports because they do not connect to any PIM routers. These VLT ports can be members of multiple PIMenabled L3 VLANs for compatibility with IGMP. To route traffic to and from the multicast source and receiver, enable PIM on the L3 side connected to the PIM router using the ip pim sparse-mode command. Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers.
VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing 3. Configure the peer-routing timeout. VLT DOMAIN mode peer-routing—timeout value value: Specify a value (in seconds) from 1 to 65535. The default value is infinity (without configuring the timeout). VLT Multicast Routing VLT multicast routing provides resiliency to multicast routed traffic during the multicast routing protocol convergence period after a VLT link or VLT peer fails using the least intrusive method (PIM) and does not alter current protocol behavior.
Non-VLT ARP Sync ARP entries (including ND entries) learned on other ports are synced with the VLT peer to support station move scenarios. NOTE: ARP entries learned on non-VLT, non-spanned VLANs are not synced with VLT peers. RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase.
Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 1) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 2) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 0 Configuring VLT To configure VLT, use the following procedure.
4. Ensure that the port channel is active. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no shutdown 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 on the VLT peer switch to configure the VLT interconnect. Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain To enable VLT and create a VLT domain, use the following steps. 1. Enable VLT on a switch, then configure a VLT domain and enter VLT-domain configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The domain ID range is from 1 to 1000.
{ip address ipv4-address/ mask | ipv6 address ipv6-address/ mask} This is the IP address to be configured on the VLT peer with the back-up destination command. 3. Ensure that the interface is active. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode no shutdown 4. Configure a VLT backup link using the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the VLT peer’s management interface. MANAGEMENT INTERFACE mode back-up destination {ip address ipv4-address/ mask | ipv6 address ipv6-address/ mask} 5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 on the VLT peer switch.
Configure a different unit ID (0 or 1) on each peer switch. Unit IDs are used for internal system operations. Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to determine the unit ID assigned to each peer switch when one peer switch reboots. Connecting a VLT Domain to an Attached Access Device (Switch or Server) To connect a VLT domain to an attached access device, use the following commands.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Configuring Enhanced VLT (eVLT) (Optional) To configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) between two VLT domains on your network, use the following procedure. For a sample configuration, refer to eVLT Configuration Example. To set up the VLT domain, use the following commands. 1. Configure the port channel to be used for the VLT interconnect on a VLT switch and enter interface configuration mode.
interface port-channel id-number Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command in the Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. 9. Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode switchport 10. Associate the port channel to the corresponding port channel in the VLT peer for the VLT connection to an attached device. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlt-peer-lag port-channel id-number 11. Ensure that the port channel is active.
EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface 8. Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the top of rack unit (shown in the following example). 9. Configure the static LAG/LACP between ports connected from VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the top of rack unit. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config entity 10. Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface 11.
ip address 10.11.206.58/16 no shutdown Configure the VLT links between VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. In the following example, port Te 1/4 in VLT peer 1 is connected to Te 1/8 of ToR and port Te 1/18 in VLT peer 2 is connected to Te 1/30 of ToR. 1. Configure the static LAG/LACP between the ports connected from VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2 to the Top of Rack unit. 2. Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3.
Verify VLT is up. Verify that the VLTi (ICL) link, backup link connectivity (heartbeat status), and VLT peer link (peer chassis) are all up.
Configure PVST+ on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 2) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree pvst Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-pvst)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-pvst)#vlan 1000 bridge-priority 4096 Configure both ends of the VLT interconnect trunk with identical PVST+ configurations. When you enable VLT, the show spanningtree pvst brief command output displays VLT information.
Figure 138. eVLT Configuration Example eVLT Configuration Step Examples In Domain 1, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1#configure Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-1)# channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 1/8-1/9 Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#vlt domain 1000 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.16.130.
Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 2. Domain_1_Peer2(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/28 - 1/29 Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-range-te-1/28-29)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-range-te-1/28-29)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer2(conf-if-range-te-1/28-29)# no shutdown In Domain 2, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 3.
PIM-Sparse Mode Configuration Example The following sample configuration shows how to configure the PIM Sparse mode designated router functionality on the VLT domain with two VLT port-channels that are members of VLAN 4001. For more information, refer to PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT. Examples of Configuring PIM-Sparse Mode The following example shows how to enable PIM multicast routing on the VLT node globally.
show vlt role • Display the current configuration of all VLT domains or a specified group on the switch. EXEC mode show running-config vlt • Display statistics on VLT operation. EXEC mode show vlt statistics • Display the RSTP configuration on a VLT peer switch, including the status of port channels used in the VLT interconnect trunk and to connect to access devices. EXEC mode show spanning-tree rstp • Display the current status of a port or port-channel interface used in the VLT domain.
Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout Dell# : 0 seconds : 150 seconds The following example shows the show vlt detail command.
HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: ICL Hello's Sent: ICL Hello's Received: 994 978 89 89 The following example shows the show spanning-tree rstp command. The bold section displays the RSTP state of port channels in the VLT domain. Port channel 100 is used in the VLT interconnect trunk (VLTi) to connect to VLT peer2. Port channels 110, 111, and 120 are used to connect to access switches or servers (vlt).
Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-ma-1/1)#exit Configure the VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#interface port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#no ip address Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#channel-member fortyGigE 1/49,50 Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#no shutdown Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-if-po-100)#exit Configure the port channel to an attached device.
Verify that the port channels used in the VLT domain are assigned to the same VLAN.
Table 93. Troubleshooting VLT (continued) Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take System MAC mismatch A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. A syslog error message and an SNMP trap are generated. Verify that the unit ID of VLT peers is not the same on both units and that the MAC address is the same on both units. Unit ID mismatch The VLT peer does not boot up. The VLTi is forced to a down state. The VLT peer does not boot up.
LAGs, you can associate the same port channel or LAG bundle that is a part of a VLT to a PVLAN by using the interface interface and switchport mode private-vlan commands. When a VLTi port in trunk mode is a member of symmetric VLT PVLANs, the PVLAN packets are forwarded only if the PVLAN settings of both the VLT nodes are identical. You can configure the VLTi in trunk mode to be a member of non-VLT PVLANs if the VLTi is configured on both the peers.
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted When the VLT peer node is rebooted, the VLAN membership of the VLTi link is preserved and when the peer node comes back online, a verification is performed with the newly received PVLAN configuration from the peer. If any differences are identified, the VLTi link is either added or removed from the VLAN. When the peer node restarts and returns online, all the PVLAN configurations are exchanged across the peers.
Table 94.
CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number. Enter the same port-channel number configured with the peer-link port-channel command as described in Enabling VLT and Creating a VLT Domain. NOTE: To be included in the VLTi, the port channel must be in Default mode (no switchport or VLAN assigned). 2. Remove an IP address from the interface. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode no ip address 3. Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel.
5. Access INTERFACE VLAN mode for the VLAN to which you want to assign the PVLAN interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id 6. Enable the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode no shutdown 7. To obtain maximum VLT resiliency, configure the PVLAN IDs and mappings to be identical on both the VLT peer nodes. Set the PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to primary. INTERFACE VLAN mode private-vlan mode primary 8. Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
ICL link or peer is down, and the ARP request for a private VLAN IP address reaches the wrong peer, the wrong peer responds to the ARP request with the peer MAC address. The IP address of the VLT node VLAN interface is synchronized with the VLT peer over ICL when the VLT peers are up. Whenever you add or delete an IP address, this updated information is synchronized with the VLT peer. IP address synchronization occurs regardless of the VLAN administrative state.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2. Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3. Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4. Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
no shutdown Dell# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 Dell#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member Port-channel 10,20 shutdown Dell# Verify that the Port Channels used in the VLT Domain are Assigned to the VLAN-Stack VLAN Dell#show vlan id 50 Codes:
no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown Dell# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-sta
• Performing routing on behalf of peer VLT nodes for a configured time period when a peer VLT node goes down. When you configure Layer 3 VLT peer routing using the peer-routing command in VLT DOMAIN mode, it applies for both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic in VLT domains. Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level. Routed VLT allows you to replace VRRP with routed VLT to route the traffic from the Layer 2 access nodes.
Consider a sample scenario in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C. When an NS traverses from Unit2 to Node B(ToR) and a corresponding NA reaches Unit1 because of LAG hashing, this NA is tunneled to Unit 2 along with some control information.
Figure 140. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL.
Traffic Destined to VLT Nodes Hosts can send traffic to one of the VLT nodes using a global IP or Link-Local address. When the host communicates with the VLT node using LLA and traffic reaches the wrong peer due to LAG level hashing in the ToR, the wrong peer routes the packet to correct the VLT node though the destination IP is LLA.
62 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 141.
Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
• • VXLAN communicates with the VTEP using a standard protocol called OvsDb Protocol. The protocol uses the JSON RPC-based message format. The VTEP acts according to the TOR schema defined by VMWare. The solution is very specific to VMWare-based orchestration platforms and does not work with other orchestration platforms. VXLAN Frame Format VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network.
• • Frame Check Sequence (FCS): VNI: The 24-bit field that is the VXLAN Network Identifier Reserved: A set of fields, 24 bits and 8 bits, that are reserved and set to zero . Note that the original Ethernet frame's FCS is not included, but new FCS is generated on the outer Ethernet frame. Configuring and Controlling VXLAN from the NVP Controller GUI To configure and control VXLAN from the NVP controller GUI, follow these steps: 1.
Figure 143. Create Hypervisor Figure 144. Edit Hypervisor Figure 145. Create Transport Connector 2. Create Service Node To create service node, the required fields are the IP address and SSL certificate of the server. The Service node is responsible for broadcast/unknown unicast/multicast traffic replication.
Figure 146. Create Service Node 3. Create VXLAN Gateway To create a VXLAN L2 Gateway, the IP address of the Gateway is mandatory. The following is the snapshot of the user interface in creating a VXLAN Gateway Figure 147. Create Gateway 4. Create Logical Switch You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure. Figure 148. Create Logical Switch 5.
Connecting to an NVP Controller To connect to an NVP controller, use the following commands. 1. feature vxlan CONFIGURATION mode feature vxlan You must configure feature VXLAN to configure vxlan-instance. 2. vxlan-instance CONFIGURATION mode vxlan-instance instance ID The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. 3. controller VxLAN INSTANCE mode controller controller IDip address port port-number tcp|ptcp|pssl|ssl The port number range is from 1 to 6632.
Dell#$n-instance 1 logical-network n 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Name : 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Description : Tunnel Key : 2 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 192.168.122.133 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) Port Vlan Bindings: Te 1/8: VLAN: 0 (0x80000001), Fo 1/49: VLAN: 0 (0x80000004), The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics interface command.
Displaying VXLAN Configurations To display the VXLAN configurations, use the following commands. The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance command. Dell#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 Instance : 1 Admin State : enabled Management IP : 192.168.200.200 Gateway IP : 3.3.3.3 MAX Backoff : 30000 Controller 1 : 192.168.122.6:6632 ssl (connected) Fail Mode : secure Port List : Fo 0/4 Te 0/16 Te 0/80 Po 2 The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance logical-network command.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance unicast-mac-remote command. Dell# show vxlan vxlan-instance <1> unicast-mac-remote Total Local Mac Count: 1 VNI MAC TUNNEL 4656 00:00:01:00:00:01 36.1.1.1 VXLAN Service nodes for BFD When multiple service nodes are available for a given Logical Network, Network Virtualization Overlay (NVO) gateway picks one of the service nodes for forwarding Broadcast unknown Unicast and Multicast Traffic (BUM).
63 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time.
Figure 150. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
Table 95. Software Features Supported on VRF Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF Configuration rollback for commands introduced or modified Yes No LLDP protocol on the port Yes No 802.
Table 95. Software Features Supported on VRF (continued) Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF Basic Yes No OSPFv3 Yes Yes IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast Yes No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes Ingress/Egress Storm-Control (perinterface/global) Yes No DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance. VRF Configuration The VRF configuration tasks are: 1.
NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them. • Assign an interface to a VRF instance. INTERFACE ip vrf forwarding vrf-name Assigning a Front-end Port to a Management VRF Starting in 9.7(0.
Configuring VRRP on a VRF Instance You can configure the VRRP feature on interfaces that belong to a VRF instance. In a virtualized network that consists of multiple VRFs, various overlay networks can exist on a shared physical infrastructure. Nodes (hosts and servers) that are part of the VRFs can be configured with IP static routes for reaching specific destinations through a given gateway in a VRF.
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 ipv6 nd dns-server — Configure DNS distribution option in RA packets originated by the router nd hop-limit — Set hop limit advertised in RA and used in IPv6 data packets originated by the router nd managed-config-flag — Hosts should use DHCP for address config nd max-ra-interval — Set IPv6 Max Router Advertisement Interval nd mtu — Configure MTU advertisements in RA packets nd other-config-flag — Hosts shou
Figure 151.
Figure 152. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.0/24 area 0 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.1 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 20.0.0.
! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.1 ! The following shows the output of the show commands on Router 1.
C C O Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.0.0/24 21.0.0.0/24 Gateway ------Direct, Vl 192 Direct, Te 1/2 via 2.0.0.
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set C O C Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.0.0/24 21.0.0.0/24 Gateway ------Direct, Vl 192 via 2.0.0.
Configuring Route Leaking without Filtering Criteria You can use the ip route-export tag command to export all the IPv4 routes corresponding to a source VRF. For leaking IPv6 routes, use the ipv6 route-export tag command. This action exposes source VRF's routes (IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the command that you use) to various other VRFs. The destinations or target VRFs then import these IPv4 or IPv6 routes using the ip route-import tag or the ipv6 route-import tag command respectively.
8. Configure the export target in VRF-blue. ip route-import 3:3 9. Configure VRF-green. ip vrf vrf-green interface-type slot/port[/subport] ip vrf forwarding VRF-green ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-green is created and the interface is assigned to it. 10. Configure the import target in the source VRF VRF-Shared for reverse communication with VRF-red and VRF-blue.
Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 00:00:11 C O C 122.2.2.0/24 44.4.4.4/32 144.4.4.0/24 110/0 Direct, Te 1/12 0/0 22:39:61 via vrf-shared:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 Direct, vrf-shared:Te 1/4 0/0 00:32:36 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Green O 33.3.3.3/32 00:00:11 via 133.3.3.3 C Direct, Te 1/13 0/0 133.3.3.0/24 110/0 22:39:61 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Shared O 11.1.1.1/32 via VRF-Red:111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, VRF-Red:Te 1/11 0/0 O 22.2.2.2/32 via VRF-Blue:122.2.
You can then use the ip route-import route-map command to import routes matching the filtering criteria defined in the import_ospf_protocol route-map. For a reply communication, VRF-blue is configured with a route-export tag. This value is then configured as route-import tag on the VRF-Red. To configure route leaking using filtering criteria, perform the following steps: 1.
O 44.4.4.4/32 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • • • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the Target VRF-B has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF.
64 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. Topics: • • • • • VRRP Overview VRRP Benefits VRRP Implementation VRRP Configuration Sample Configurations VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 153. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. VRRP Implementation Within a single VRRP group, up to 12 virtual IP addresses are supported.
Table 97. Recommended VRRP Advertise Intervals Recommended Advertise Interval Groups/Interface Total VRRP Groups Groups/Interface Less than 250 1 second 12 Between 250 and 450 2–3 seconds 24 Between 450 and 600 3–4 seconds 36 Between 600 and 800 4 seconds 48 Between 800 and 1000 5 seconds 84 Between 1000 and 1200 7 seconds 100 Between 1200 and 1500 8 seconds 120 VRRP Configuration By default, VRRP is not configured.
The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
For more information, refer to VRRP Implementation. To activate a VRRP group on an interface (so that VRRP group starts transmitting VRRP packets), configure at least one virtual IP address in a VRRP group. The virtual IP address is the IP address of the virtual router and does not require the IP address mask. You can configure up to 12 virtual IP addresses on a single VRRP group (VRID).
Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 1768, Gratuitous ARP sent: 5 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:6f Virtual IP address: 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.2 10.10.10.3 10.10.10.10 Authentication: (none) -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/2, VRID: 111, Version: 2 Net: 10.10.2.1 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.10.2.
Configuring VRRP Authentication Simple authentication of VRRP packets ensures that only trusted routers participate in VRRP processes. When you enable authentication, Dell Networking OS includes the password in its VRRP transmission. The receiving router uses that password to verify the transmission. NOTE: You must configure all virtual routers in the VRRP group the same: you must enable authentication with the same password or authentication is disabled. NOTE: Authentication for VRRPv3 is not supported.
The following example shows how to verify preempt is disabled using the show conf command. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.
Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost). If the tracked interface’s state goes up, the VRRP group’s priority increases by 10.
The following example shows how to verify tracking using the show conf command. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#show conf ! vrrp-group 111 advertise-interval 10 authentication-type simple 7 387a7f2df5969da4 no preempt priority 255 track TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 virtual-address 10.10.10.1 virtual-address 10.10.10.2 virtual-address 10.10.10.3 virtual-address 10.10.10.10 The following example shows verifying the tracking status.
Setting VRRP Initialization Delay When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot. You can delay VRRP initialization to allow the IGP and EGP protocols to be enabled prior to selecting the VRRP Master. This delay ensures that VRRP initializes with no errors or conflicts. You can configure the delay for up to 15 minutes, after which VRRP enables normally.
Figure 154. VRRP for IPv4 Topology Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.
State: Master, Priority: 200, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 817, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:63 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.3 Authentication: (none) R2# Router 3 R3(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.1.1.2/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#vrrp-group 99 R3(conf-if-te-3/21-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.
Figure 155. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default-vrf State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 135 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:
instance in order that there is one MASTER and one backup router for each VRF. In VRF-1 and VRF-2, Switch-2 serves as owner-master of the VRRP group and Switch-1 serves as the backup. On VRF-3, Switch-1 is the owner-master and Switch-2 is the backup. In VRF-1 and VRF-2 on Switch-2, the virtual IP and node IP address, subnet, and VRRP group are the same. On Switch-1, the virtual IP address, subnet, and VRRP group are the same in VRF-1 and VRF-2, but the IP address of the node interface is unique.
Figure 156. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Example Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-1 (Non-VLAN) Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf 0 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177.
S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#no shutdown Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8 -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 119, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#no ip address S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#no shutdown ! S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#interface vlan 100 S1(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-vl-100)#tagged TenGigabitethernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-vl-100)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177.
! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.2/24 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#tagged TenGigabitethernet 1/1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177. S2(conf-if-vl-100-vrid-101)#priority 255 S2(conf-if-vl-100-vrid-101)#virtual-address 10.10.1.
VRRP for IPv6 Configuration This section shows VRRP IPv6 topology with CLI configurations. Consider an example VRRP for IPv6 configuration in which the IPv6 VRRP group consists of two routers. Figure 157. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI.
NOTE: You must configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface. The VRRPv3 group becomes active as soon as you configure the link local address. Afterwards, you can configure the group’s virtual IPv6 address. R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
State: Backup, Priority: 90, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 214, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8 TenGigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down:
65 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device.
NOTE: The system reboots when the offline diagnostics complete. This is an automatic process. The following warning message appears when you implement the offline stack-unit command: Warning - Diagnostic execution will cause stack-unit to reboot after completion of diags. Proceed with OfflineDiags [confirm yes/no]:y After the system goes offline, you must reload or run the online stack-unit stack-unit-number command for the normal operation. 2. Confirm the offline status.
Speed in RPM The following example shows the diag command (standalone unit). Dell#diag stack-unit 1 Warning - diagnostic execution will cause multiple link flaps on the peer side - advisable to shut directly connected ports Proceed with Diags [confirm yes/no]: yes Dell#Jan 16 02:22:46: %S4810:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_STARTED: Starting diags on stack unit 1 00:06:47 : Approximate time to complete the Diags ... 13 Mins The following example shows the diag command (stack member).
Test 1 - Psu Power Good Test ....................................... diagS4810ChkPsuPresence[625]: ERROR: Psu : 0 is not present Test 2.000 - Fan Psu Status test .................................... Test 2.001 - Fan Psu Status test .................................... Test 2 - Fan Psu Status Test ....................................... Test 3.000 - Fan board presence Test ................................ Test 3.001 - Fan board presence Test ................................ Test 3 - Fan Board Presence Test .
Hardware Watchdog Timer The hardware watchdog command automatically reboots an Dell Networking OS switch/router with a single RPM that is unresponsive. This is a last resort mechanism intended to prevent a manual power cycle. Using the Show Hardware Commands The show hardware command tree consists of commands used with the system. These commands display information from a hardware sub-component and from hardware-based feature tables.
EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack-unit {1–6} unit {0-1} execute-shell-cmd {command} • View the Multicast IPMC replication table from the bShell. EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack-unit {1–6} unit {0-1} ipmc-replication • View the internal statistics for each port-pipe (unit) on per port basis. EXEC Privilege mode show hardware stack-unit {1–6} unit {0-1} port-stats [detail] • View the stack-unit internal registers for each port-pipe.
QSFP 52 Temp Low Warning threshold QSFP 52 Voltage Low Warning threshold QSFP 52 Bias Low Warning threshold QSFP 52 RX Power Low Warning threshold =================================== QSFP 52 Temperature QSFP 52 Voltage QSFP 52 TX1 Bias Current QSFP 52 TX2 Bias Current QSFP 52 TX3 Bias Current QSFP 52 TX4 Bias Current QSFP 52 RX1 Power QSFP 52 RX2 Power QSFP 52 RX3 Power QSFP 52 RX4 Power = = = = 0.000C 3.135V 1.000mA 0.112mW = = = = = = = = = = 30.602C 3.311V 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mA 0.000mW 0.
Recognize an Under-Voltage Condition If the system detects an under-voltage condition, it sends an alarm. To recognize this condition, look for the following system message: %CHMGR-1-CARD_SHUTDOWN: Major alarm: stack unit 2 down - auto-shutdown due to under voltage. This message indicates that the specified card is not receiving enough power. In response, the system first shuts down Power over Ethernet (PoE). If the under-voltage condition persists, line cards are shut down, then the RPMs.
Table 100. ASICs by Platform Hardware FP CSF S50N, S50V 2 0 S25V, S25P, S25N 1 0 As shown in the following example, you can tune buffers at three locations. 1. CSF — Output queues going from the CSF. 2. FP Uplink — Output queues going from the FP to the CSF IDP links. 3. Front-End Link — Output queues going from the FP to the front-end PHY. All ports support eight queues, four for data traffic and four for control traffic. All eight queues are tunable.
Figure 158. Buffer Tuning Points Deciding to Tune Buffers Dell Networking recommends exercising caution when configuring any non-default buffer settings, as tuning can significantly affect system performance. The default values work for most cases. As a guideline, consider tuning buffers if traffic is bursty (and coming from several interfaces). In this case: • • • Reduce the dedicated buffer on all queues/interfaces. Increase the dynamic buffer on all interfaces.
• Apply the buffer profile to a line card. CONFIGURATION mode buffer fp-uplink linecard • Apply the buffer profile to a CSF to FP link. CONFIGURATION mode buffer csf linecard Dell Networking OS Behavior: If you attempt to apply a buffer profile to a non-existent port-pipe, Dell Networking OS displays the following message: %DIFFSERV-2-DSA_BUFF_CARVING_INVALID_PORT_SET: Invalid FP port-set 2 for linecard 2. Valid range of port-set is <0-1>. However, the configuration still appears in the running-config.
2 3 4 5 6 7 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 3.00 256 256 256 256 256 256 The following example shows viewing the default buffer profile on a linecard. Dell#sho buffer-profile detail fp-uplink stack-unit 1 port-set 0 Stack Unit 1 Port-set 0 Buffer-profile fsqueue-hig Dynamic Buffer 1256.00 (Kilobytes) Queue# Dedicated Buffer Buffer Packets (Kilobytes) 0 3.00 256 1 3.00 256 2 3.00 256 3 3.00 256 4 3.00 256 5 3.00 256 6 3.00 256 7 3.
buffer dynamic 1256 ! buffer-profile fp fsqueue-hig buffer dedicated queue0 3 queue1 3 queue2 3 queue3 3 queue4 3 queue5 3 queue6 3 queue7 3 buffer dynamic 1256 ! buffer fp-uplink stack-unit 1 port-set 0 buffer-policy fsqueue-hig buffer fp-uplink stack-unit 1 port-set 1 buffer-policy fsqueue-hig ! Interface range tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 18 buffer-policy fsqueue-fp Dell#show run interface tengigabitethernet 1/10 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 no ip address Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware
PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0 HOL DROPS on COS1 HOL DROPS on COS2 HOL DROPS on COS3 HOL DROPS on COS4 HOL DROPS on COS5 HOL DROPS on COS6 HOL DROPS on COS7 HOL DROPS on COS8 HOL DROPS on COS9 HOL DROPS on COS10 HOL DROPS on COS11 HOL DROPS on COS12 HOL DROPS on COS13 HOL DROPS on COS1
0 0 0 0 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 7 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 17 2144854 0 124904297 18 0 0 0 19 0 0 0 20
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 49 49 49 52 52 52 52 53 53 53 53 54/1 54/2 54/3 54/4 Internal Internal 43 0 44 0 45 0 46 0 47 0 48 0 49 0 50 0 51 0 52 0 61 0 62 0 63 0 64 0 65 0 66 0 67 0 68 0 69 0 70 0 71 0 72 0 53 0 57 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4659499 0 0 Dataplane Statistics The sh
rxError :0 rxFwdError :0 rxDatapathErr :0 rxPkt(COS0 ) :0 rxPkt(COS1 ) :0 rxPkt(COS2 ) :0 rxPkt(COS3 ) :0 rxPkt(COS4 ) :0 rxPkt(COS5 ) :0 rxPkt(COS6 ) :0 rxPkt(COS7 ) :0 rxPkt(COS8 ) :773 rxPkt(COS9 ) :0 rxPkt(COS10) :0 rxPkt(COS11) :0 rxPkt(UNIT0) :773 transmitted :12698 txRequested :12698 noTxDesc :0 txError :0 txReqTooLarge :0 txInternalError :0 txDatapathErr :0 txPkt(COS0 ) :0 txPkt(COS1 ) :0 txPkt(COS2 ) :0 txPkt(COS3 ) :0 txPkt(COS4 ) :0 txPkt(COS5 ) :0 txPkt(COS6 ) :0 txPkt(COS7 ) :0 txPkt(COS8 ) :0
Output 00.06 Mbits/sec, Dell# 8 packets/sec, 0.00% of line-rate Display Stack Member Counters You can use the show hardware command to display internal receive and transmit statistics, based on the selected command option. The following example is a sample of the output for the counters option.
Description RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV4 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter --------------------Interface Fo 0/60 : Description RX - IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV4 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV6 L3 routed multicast Packets RX - Unicast Packet Counter RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter
RX - IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets RX - IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter RX - IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets RX - Unicast Packet Counter RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter RX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter RX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter RX - Good P
A mini core dump contains critical information in the event of a crash. Mini core dump files are located in flash:/ (root dir). The application mini core filename format is f10StkUnit..acore.mini.txt. The kernel mini core filename format is f10StkUnit.kcore.mini.txt. The following are sample filenames. When a member or standby unit crashes, the mini core file gets uploaded to master unit.
66 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 101. General Internet Protocols RFC# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 768 User Datagram Protocol 7.6.
Table 102. General IPv4 Protocols (continued) R F C # Full Name 8 2 6 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol Z-Series S-Series 7.6.1 10 Using ARP to 2 Implement 7 Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 10 DOMAIN NAMES 3 IMPLEMENTATION 5 AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.1 10 A Standard for the 4 Transmission of IP 2 Datagrams over IEEE 802 Networks 7.6.1 11 Path MTU 91 Discovery 7.6.1 13 Network Time 0 Protocol (Version 3) 5 Specification, Implementation and Analysis 7.6.
Table 102. General IPv4 Protocols (continued) R F C # Full Name 3 0 6 9 VLAN Aggregation for Efficient IP Address Allocation Z-Series S-Series 7.8.1 31 Protection Against a 2 Variant of the Tiny 8 Fragment Attack 7.6.1 General IPv6 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv6 protocols. Table 103. General IPv6 Protocols RF C# Full Name 188 6 DNS Extensions to support IP version 6 7.8.1 1981 Path MTU (Pa Discovery for rtial IP version 6 ) 7.
Table 103. General IPv6 Protocols (continued) RF C# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 429 Internet 1 Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Addressing Architecture 7.8.1 444 Internet 3 Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the IPv6 Specification 7.8.1 486 Neighbor 1 Discovery for IPv6 8.3.12.0 486 IPv6 Stateless 2 Address Autoconfigurati on 8.3.12.0 517 5 8.3.12.
Table 104. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) (continued) RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series draft-ietf-idrrestart- 06 Graceful Restart Mechanism for BGP 7.8.1 Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for OSPF protocol. Table 105. Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 1587 The OSPF Not-So-Stubby Area (NSSA) Option 7.6.1 2154 OSPF with Digital Signatures 7.6.1 2328 OSPF Version 2 7.6.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for RIP protocol. Table 107. Routing Information Protocol (RIP) RFC# Full Name S-Series 1058 Routing Information Protocol 7.8.1 2453 RIP Version 7.8.1 4191 Default Router Preferences and More-Specific Routes 8.3.12.0 Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 108.
Table 109. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 1215 A Convention for Defining Traps for use with the SNMP 7.6.1 1493 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges [except for 7.6.1 the dot1dTpLearnedEntryDiscards object] 1724 RIP Version 2 MIB Extension 1850 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 7.6.1 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.1 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.
Table 109. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 7.6.1 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.1 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information 7.6.1 Base: Ethernet Statistics Table, Ethernet History Control Table, Ethernet History Table, Alarm Table, Event Table, Log Table 2863 The Interfaces Group MIB 7.6.
Table 109. Network Management (continued) RFC# Full Name S4810 IEEE 802.1AB Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 IEEE 802.1AB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802.1 organizationally defined discovery information. (LLDP DOT1 MIB and LLDP DOT3 MIB) 7.7.1 IEEE 802.1AB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802.
Some pages of iSupport require a login. To request an iSupport account, go to: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/AccountRequest/AccountRequest.aspx If you have forgotten or lost your account information, contact Dell TAC for assistance.
